Home

Nikon 13187 User's Manual

1. 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing for i METE e 7 asn Sync spee Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing Flash shutter speed 1 60 Flash cntrl for built in flash TTL set in the Custom Settings menu Bposure comp for fash odeling Tias To display the menus press the MENU button m sain heacig i 3 racketing order Select Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing 410K button shooting mode RESET set in the Custom Settings menu highlight an option and press Choose AE amp flash Auto bracketing set to vary both exposure and flash level AE o er only to vary only exposure or Flash only to AE AE only Flash only vary only flash level WB WB bracketing E ADL bracketing 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which they will be taken et Number of shots SF E es Bracketing progress indicator gt ww ZJ BKT button Main command dial Control panel No of shots Bracketing progress indicator Bracketing order JF ooo m Normal exposure underexposure overexposure E Oon b Normal exposure overexposure oF am Normal exposure underexposure BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder see Santis cate 125 55 wf iaol 28k right the control panel will show GM 153 3 Selecta bracketing increment Pressing the BKT button and rotate
2. 6 CE 0 ILIA CUSTOM SETTING MENU CUSTOM SETTING MENU Reset custom settings Fall Reset custom settings Autofocus a Autofocus b Metering exposure ka b Metering exposure gt Timers AE lock c Timers AE lock Y Shooting display E d Shooting display Uik Bracketing flash e Bracketing flash Controls S f Controls Movie P g Movie MENU button Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings Custom Setting groups to suit individual preferences a Aatatocss a AF priority selection a2 AF S priority selection ES K 33 Focus tracking with lock on AF a4 AF point illumination AUTO a5 Focus point wrap around OFF a6 Number of focus points AF39 b Metering exposure b1ISO sensitivity step value 1 3 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 b3 Easy exposure compensation OFF b4 Center weighted area Oh b5 Fine tune optimal exposure Main menu c1 Shutter release button AE L OFF c Timers AE lock Shutter release button AE L OFF c2 Standby timer 6s c3 Self timer c4 Monitor off delay c5 Remote on duration 1m d1Beep d Shooting display Beep d2 Viewfinder grid display OFF d3 ISO display and adjustment OFF d4 Screen tips ON d5CL mode shooting speed 3 d6 Max continuous release 100 Bracketing flash z U Reset custom settings a b Metering exposure c Timers AE lock d Shooting display Bracketing flash f Controls Movie e1 Flash sync speed 1 200 Flash shutter speed 1 60 Reset
3. 06 112 Eg Flash compensation indicator sececseeeee 148 yh K appears when memory remains for over Fu 1000 exposures ss sssesssessseesssesssessseesssessseossessse 36 Number of exposures remaining ss sssss 36 Number of shots remaining before memory bufter fil Sercem 38 84 335 SO Sensi esanean 105 Preset white balance recording indicator 122 Active D Lighting amount ss ssssseesssssessssseeesss 138 Time lapse recording indicatol sesecsee 170 Manual lens number c csessscsesesssessseeseeseeees 174 Capture mode INICAtOM eeseseseeseseeseeseees 195 HDMI CEC connection indicator csecsee 205 The Viewfinder 1 2 3 uoo 00009900000 OO0O0O0000000 oo000000000 OOO a Tida our tessa dannat MA ASS j Framing grid displayed when On is selected for Custom Setting d2 uu seceseseseesesesseseeseeees 229 FOCUS POINTS ccssssssesssesssesesessseseseees 38 101 222 A AF area mode es esssssseeesssecssssseeesssecesssseresssseeessss 99 JEJ AF area brackets ssssssssssesssssssseeen 33 37 179 Focus indicator ssesssssessssessssseessseesssees 38 102 103 5 E assesses scisssciivaepsucssac danse spatinwnctesecacon 109 BJ Autoexposure AE 1OCk cssssssssssesnsssssseeesesee 110 TA Shutter speed ou esesesecsessesssssssssssesseseeseeeees 76 78 H AUTOFOCUS MOde ss ssssssessssseesssssseesssseessssssressseressss 97
4. AF5 5 AF area mode 52 Focus point 3 101 Metering 109 AE lock hold Off 102 110 Bracketing 153 Picture Control settings 129 Flash compensation Off 148 Exposure compensation Off 112 Exposure delay mode Off 231 Flash mode FV lock 149 Multiple exposure 160 Flexible program Off 75 NEF RAW Off 242 1 Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset 2 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress shooting will end Starting time shooting interval and number of intervals and shots are not reset 3 Focus point not displayed if auto area AF is selected for AF area mode 4 Current Picture Control only 5 If multiple exposure is currently in progress shooting will end and multiple exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point Gain and number of shots are not reset B rac ket i n g P S A and M Modes Only Bracketing automatically varies exposure flash level Active D Lighting ADL or white balance slightly with each shot bracketing the current value Choose in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure flash level i TTL and where supported auto aperture flash control modes only see pages 146 236 and 294 white balance or Active D Lighting and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot or to experiment with different settings for the same subject EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing To vary exposure and or flash level over a series of photographs
5. NEF JPEG When photographs taken at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are viewed on the camera with only one memory card inserted only the JPEG image will be displayed If both copies are recorded to the same memory card both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted If the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Role played by card in Slot 2 gt RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 option deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF RAW image Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from E Large M Medium or E Small note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area M 89 Image area Option Size pixels Print size cm in EX 36X24 1 0 6 016 x 4 016 50 9 x 34 0 20 1 x 13 4 pie 4512 x 3 008 38 2 x 25 5 15 0x 10 0 FX format 3 008 x 2 008 25 5 x 17 0 10 0x 6 7 DX 24x16 1 5 Large 3 936 x 2 624 33 3 x 22 2 13 1 x 8 7 ree 2 944 x 1 968 24 9x16 7 98x 6 6 DX format 1 968 x 1 312 16 7X11 1 66x 4 4 Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Image size can be set by pressing the amp QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel Q QUAL button Sub command dial Control panel The Shooting Menu Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size
6. lt ii 2 Check the indicators in the viewfinder Focus point When the focus operation is complete the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder In focus indicator Description Subject in focus gt Focus point is between camera and subject lt 4 Focus point is behind subject gt lt Camera unable to focus using autofocus In focus Buffer flashes See page 98 indicator capacity ale 28 While the shutter release button is pressed halfway the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer O 84 will be displayed in the viewfinder Step 5 Shoot Smoothly press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to release the shutter and record the photograph The memory card access lamp next to the memory card slot cover will light while the photograph is being recorded to the memory card Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the Memory card access power source until the lamp has gone out and recording lamp is complete The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down Focus press halfway Shoot press all the way down The Standby Timer The viewfinder and the control panel shutter speed and aperture displays will turn off if no operations are perfor
7. 103 104 ISO Sensitivity ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed Choose from settings that range from ISO 100 to ISO 6400 in steps equivalent to 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0 3 to 2 EV above ISO 6400 are also available for special situations Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option which allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the Q amp ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder Control panel Viewfinder 105 106 AUTO If the mode dial is rotated to P S A or M after AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in another mode the ISO sensitivity last selected in P S A or M mode will be restored Hi 0 3 Hi 2 The settings Hi 0 3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 2 EV over ISO 6400 ISO 8000 25600 equivalent Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines Lo 0 3 Lo 1 The settings Lo 0 3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 100 ISO 80 50 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly higher than
8. 40 EE Scene Modes A Portrait Use for portraits with soft natural looking skin tones If the subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used background details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth Landscape Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Use for snapshots of children Clothing and background details are vividly rendered while skin tones remain soft and natural A Y L Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in which the main subject stands out clearly The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off To take a sequence of shots select continuous release mode M 6 83 41 Close Up Use for close up shots of flowers insects 42 and other small objects a macro lens can be used to focus at very close ranges Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the background in portraits taken under low light Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Night Landscape photographing night landscapes including street lighting and neon signs The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur RN Party Indoor Capture the effects of
9. 75 S Shutter priority auto 76 A Aperture priority auto 77 M Manual sisssicsssessssumaasinvennaaarts 78 VVU2 iiinn 81 S Single frame c ecsecesseeseeees 6 83 CL Continuous low speed 6 83 229 CH Continuous high speed 6 83 Q Quiet shutter release 6 83 Self timMer ne 6 83 85 w Remote control 6 83 85 MupP Mirror Up ececseseeees 6 83 88 8 Face priority AF sess 52 fin Wide aread AF ssesessessesseeee 52 ba Normal area AF sseceeceeseeee 52 46 Subject tracking AF 52 E IVIALIIN sssssedisarsannenianieniians 109 e Center weighted 109 226 CJ Spot e sesessseseeseseessseerssseessseersssee 109 AUTO Auto flash 144 145 Red eye reduction 144 145 SLOW Slow SYNC seseeseeees 144 145 REAR Rear curtain sync 144 145 Exposure compensation 112 Flash compensation 148 Flexible program 75 Live view button 49 57 BMD INFO DUTTON eeeeseeseeeeeees 9 11 38 SWItCh seesssssessssessssseesssseessssessseerssseesss 2 WB White balance sssssessssee 115 PRE Preset manual 115 121 BKT Bracketing 0 153 178 ACID a teisstratarisensiantiaeteinceunainets 18 Focus indicator 38 102 103 r Memory buffer 00 38 84 4 Flash ready indicator 39 Numerics 12
10. Saving User Settings 1 Select a mode Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode 2 Adjust settings Make the desired adjustments to flexible program mode P shutter speed modes S and M aperture modes A and M exposure and flash compensation flash mode focus point metering autofocus and AF area modes bracketing and settings in the shooting M 214 and Custom Settings M 219 menus note that the camera will not store the options selected for Storage folder File naming Image area Manage Picture Control Multiple exposure or Interval timer shooting 3 Select Save user settings ET ormat memory car s Press the MENU button to display the menus S eset user settings Highlight Save user settings in the setup EB Monitor brightness 0 P Clean image sensor menu and press gt ee Lock mirror up for cleaning Image Dust Off ref photo a D HDMI MENU button 4 Select Save to U1 or Save to U2 Save user setting Highlight Save to U1 or Save to U2 and press P Save to U2 81 5 Save user settings Sores sti ave to Highlight Save settings and press to assign the settings selected in Steps 1 and 2 C49 to the mode dial position selected in Step 4 Spal Recalling User Settings Simply rotate the mode dial to U1 to recall the settings assigned to Save to U1 or to U2 to recall the settings assigned to Save to U2 Resetting User Settings To reset settings
11. b selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display The focus point display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that for No wrap example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect Wrap 222 a6 Number of Focus Points MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description Oo0 AF39 39points Choose from the 39 focus points shown at right Seesesgeca0 00 Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right Use for quick focus point selection a7 Built in AF assist Illuminator MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor AF11 11 points Option Description The AF assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor viewfinder photography only AF assist illumination is only available when both of the following conditions are met On 1 AF S is selected for autofocus mode M 97 or single servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF A mode 2 Auto area AF is chosen for AF area mode M 99 or an option other than auto area AF is chosen and the center focus point is selected off The AF assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor
12. 129 Language essssessesssesssesseessessees 27 253 LCD illumination 2 231 LENS wessessseseseees 25 26 172 259 285 LENS C Pisiin 25 Lens FOCUS ring ssesssss 25 55 103 Lens MOUNt ccscscesererees 3 26 103 Live vieW s ssssseere s 49 56 57 64 Live view photography 49 Live view selector 49 57 Lo Sensitivity ss sssssessss010ss000 106 Lock mirror up for cleaning 303 Long exposure NR ssessesssessessse 218 Lossless compressed Type 94 M M medium eesesecseeseeeeseens 63 95 Main command dial c00e 12 Manage Picture Control 134 Manual ses diswcstnceatstveseitnedesiveseanes 78 103 Manual Flash cntrl for built in ELS 0 erence ney erenes errs rear 236 Manual FOCUS sssessesseeseeees 55 103 MatriX osian 109 Max continuous release 230 Maximum aperture 103 147 296 Maximum Sensitivity eee 107 MB D14 232 233 247 255 297 MB D14 battery type 232 Memory buffer 38 84 Memory card 29 31 250 334 335 Memory card capacity 0 335 Metering s ess essesseesseessesseessressessees 109 Microphone csceseeee 3 61 62 65 Miniature effect esesseeseeeeseees 276 Minimum aperture 04 26 73 Minimum shutter speed 107 Mirea er n 119 DATE OW sesssesssessessessseesserssessees 85 88 303 Mirror Up sessessssesssessesesseosseseese 6 83 88 Mode ial
13. 39 175 227 Start printing PictBridge 198 201 Storage FOIKES essecseeseseeseesees 215 Straighten euminananicasimvonen 274 Sub command diial seseeseeee 12 Subject tracking AF ccseseeees 52 T Television ss ssssessssessssecessseressseesssees 204 Thumbnail playback 0 185 TiM Eisis isianasaess 253 Time stamp PictBridge 198 Time ZONE nssenssessessseoseesressseesee 27 253 Time zone and date 27 253 Time lapse photography 168 TMM E ennt 85 164 TONN G sonseras 132 133 MAMA pinsin 265 Trimming MOVIES ssesssessssssesseessees 69 Tripod erties cece eens 3 Two button reset uu eesesecseseceeeees 151 Type DION eeescsseeeseesees 285 287 Type GIONS eessesssseseseeesees 285 287 U USB oisinn 194 196 USB Cable uu sesessesesseseesees 194 196 Use GPS to set camera clock 175 User settings e ssesseseseessessesssesssesseos 81 UTC a 27 175 183 V Vibration reduction mode switch 25 Viewfinder c000 8 33 297 326 Viewfinder eyepiece esecee 86 Viewfinder eyepiece cap 86 Viewfinder FOCUS 33 297 Viewfinder grid display 229 ViewNX 2 u cessesssssecssssscseesseecees 193 217 Vignette CONTKOL sssssseecseseees 218 Virtual horizon 55 62 243 258 Vivid Set Picture Control 129 VOIUNIG sa uisnienicnnininiintisninineies 67 W Warm filter Filter effects 267 WB i
14. Guide No 90100 34 111 34 111 38 125 28 92 30 98 21 69 1 Ifa color filter is attached to the SB 910 SB 900 or SB 700 when AUTO or 5 flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately 2 Wireless flash control is not available with the SB 400 3 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 or SB 700 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 4 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 910 SB 900 and SB 700 with standard illumination SB R200 e SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to three groups The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft 35 mm zoom head position its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the 4 Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 293 The following features are available with CLS compatible flash units Adva
15. IW Flash compensation sse ssesssesssesseesseesseeseesss 148 Commander MOde s ssesssesssessseessesssesseesseesseess 237 28 Exposure COMPENSATION nesssseesssseessssessssseees 112 1 Non FX formats including DX based movie format displayed in yellow 1 63 89 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four nine or 72 images press the amp amp ISO button a E Eg i Full frame Thumbnail playback Calendar playback playback To oo Description orcarina ISO Press Q amp ISO to increase the number of images displayed Press amp QUAL to reduce the number of images Q QUAL displayed When four images are displayed press to Display fewer images view highlighted image full frame Use multi selector to highlight images for full frame playback playback zoom M 187 deletion M 189 Highlight images or protection M 188 View highlighted image Press to display the highlighted image full frame peek ane i am See page 189 for more information image Change protect status of highlighted image See page 188 for more information Return to shooting 3 O Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken mode a immediately Retouch photo A FB e retouched copy of current photograph M 69 185 Calendar Playback To view images taken on a selected date press the Q1 ISO b
16. performed for about 10 seconds See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay 228 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the information display see Custom Setting d8 Information display A 231 EE Changing Settings in the Information Display To change settings for the items listed below press the Hf button in the information display Highlight items using the multi selector and press to view options for the highlighted item JE Movie settings sisi hi cicteecrratnrealiiienliers IF High ISO noise reduction BEJ Active D Lighting s sess 2 4 Vignette COntrol ssssssssesssssssssssessssssseseresssssrerrressss 5 Depth of field preview button assignment 244 1 5 BJ Fn button assignment cssssssssesessssseeeessee 242 AE L AF L button assignment csssecsseeessees 244 BE Remote control mode cssssssssssusssssssesenssesseesen 85 E Long exposure noise reduction ccesseeeees 218 KY Role played by card in Slot 2 cscsssssseeesesssssee 96 Tool Tips A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the information display Tool tips can be turned off using Custom Setting d4 Screen Tips M 229 Movie settings Fa somN HF ON PO OM 52s Bm a 11 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settin
17. 1 Select a white balance option in the White balance shooting menu i To display the menus press the MENU button Drect i Select White balance in the shooting menu A 2 Cloudy then highlight a white balance option and _ Adjust press gt If an option other than Auto MENU button Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Auto Fluorescent or Choose color temp is selected highlight the desired setting and press For information on fine tuning preset white balance see page 125 2 Fine tune white balance Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color Coordinates temperature with each increment Adjustment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase green Green G Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue lt 4 Increase amber 117 118 3 Press Press k to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned an asterisk X will be displayed in the control panel EE The o WB Button At settings other than LEI Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the a
18. 6s m c3 Self timer 27 c4 Monitor off delay Playback Tmin Os 228 nigereien 4 c5 Remote on duration 1 min 228 d1 Beep vl oF m Pitch d2 Viewfinder grid display 229 d3 ISO display and adjustment Show frame count 229 d4 Screen tips 229 d5 CL mode shooting speed 3 fps 229 d6 Max continuous release 100 230 d7 File number sequence On 230 Option AA d8 Information display Auto 231 i i O Bposwedeymode 0 B o n d11 Flash warning 231 d12 MB D14 battery type LR6 AA alkaline 232 Use MB D14 d13 Battery order 233 1 Flash sync speed 1 200 s 234 e2 1 60 s 235 e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash e4 Exposure comp for flash Entire frame 240 e5 Modeling flash 241 6 Auto bracketing set AE amp flash 241 e7 Bracketing order MTR gt under gt 341 over f1 OK button shooting mode ee ie 241 f2 Assign Fn button Choose image area 242 f3 Assign preview button Preview 244 f4 Assign AE L AF L button AE AF lock 244 f5 Customize command dials Exposure compensation LJ Reverse rotation Shutter speed sae Q Mensa 0A 6 Release buttontousedal Wo 2 f7 Slot empty release lock Enable release 246 f8 Reverse indicators a hiiit 246 fo Assign MB D14 6B button AE AFlok 247 gt AssignFrbutton Noe 24 g2 Index marking 248 93 AE AF lock 248 g4 Take photos 248 Default settings restored with Reset custom settings M 2
19. 8 Select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button Note the following e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing gt generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway C1 39 20 First Steps Charge the Battery The camera is powered by an EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery supplied To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 25 battery charger before use About 2 hours and 35 minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Connect the AC power cable Connect the power cable The AC adapter plug should be in the position shown at right do not rotate 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 3 Insert the battery Place the battery in the battery bay as shown in the illustration on the charger 4 Plug the charger in Battery Charging The CHARGE lamp will flash slowly while the battery charging complete charges V Charging the Battery Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5 35 C 41 95 F The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 C 32 F or above 60 C 140 F 5 Remove the battery when ch
20. AF area brackets Adjusting Viewfinder Focus If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above select single servo autofocus AF S Q 97 single point AF M 99 and the center focus point M 101 and then frame a high contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway to focus the camera With the camera in focus use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder If necessary viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses M 297 33 34 Basic Photography and Playback Point and Shoot Photography amp and Modes This section describes how to take photographs in auto mode an automatic point and shoot mode in which the majority of settings l l ie AUTO are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions and O a in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit To 3 take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in control of other settings rotate the mode dial to to select auto flash off mode Step 1 Turn the Camera On 1 Turn the camera on Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on The control panel will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the control panel or viewfinder PSEk N Control panel Description Battery fully charge
21. AF assist illumination is available with lenses with focal lengths of 24 200 mm It can not however be used to assist the focus operation with the following lenses e AF S NIKKOR 200mm f 2G ED VR II e AF S NIKKOR 200 400mm f 4G ED VR II e AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 200 400mm f 4G e AF S NIKKOR 300mm f 2 8G ED VR II IF ED At ranges under 0 7 m 2 ft 4 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF S NIKKOR 16 35mm f 4G ED VR e AF Zoom Nikkor 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6D IF e AF S Zoom Nikkor 17 35mm f 2 8D IF ED AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED VR e AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 17 55mm f 2 8G IF ED e AF S NIKKOR 28 300mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR e AF S DX VR Zoom Nikkor 18 200mm e AF S NIKKOR 35mm f 1 4G f 3 5 5 6G IF ED e AF Zoom Micro Nikkor ED 70 180mm e AF Zoom Nikkor 20 35mm f 2 8D IF f 4 5 5 6D e AF Zoom Nikkor 24 85mm f 2 8 4D IF e AF S VR Micro Nikkor 105mm f 2 8G IF ED e AF S NIKKOR 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5G ED VR At ranges under 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF S DX NIKKOR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6GED e AF S Zoom Nikkor 28 70mm f 2 8D IF ED VR Il e AF Micro Nikkor 200mm f 4D IF ED e AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED e AF SVRZoom Nikkor 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED At ranges under 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when ligh
22. DIGITAL CAMERA D600 User s Manual Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera To get the most from your camera please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read by all who use the product Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used V This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before using the camera CH This icon marks references to other pages in this manual Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold Camera Settings The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used Help Use the camera s on board help feature for help on menu items and other topics See page 18 for details Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html A For Your Safet Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety CO xviii xix Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from Q The Table of Contents Q The Q amp A Index cccssscsscsesesssees Q Menu Options cccssssceees Introduction m iv G Trou
23. Di 1080 k seconds and shooting time of 25 minutes proceed to step 5 lt Move 3 Choose the interval Time lapse photography nterval Press lt or P to highlight minutes or I omh seconds press A or W to change Choose an 00 01 30 interval longer than the slowest anticipated Se Lantana Hi shutter speed Press to continue 168 4 Select the shooting time Time lapse photography 5 CSShooting time Press lt or P to highlight hours or minutes A press A or W to change The maximum 00 0130 shooting time is 7 hours and 59 minutes 0002 7 89 27 7 HI Press to continue Start shooting Time lapse photography Highlight On and press to return to the oie shooting menu without starting time lapse lt a Sig photography highlight Off and press 00 02 7 89 27 7 29S z Time lapse photography starts after 3 s The i cat camera takes photographs at the interval selected in Step 3 for the time selected in Step 4 The memory card access lamp lights while each shot is recorded note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary Shooting will not begin if a time lapse movie can not be recorded at current settings for example if the memory card is full the interval or shooting time is zero the interval is longer than the sho
24. The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also For information on the shooting modes in which AF assist is available see page 309 See page 290 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist 223 224 b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making adjustments to ISO b1 ISO sensitivity step value sensitivity If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is a maintained when the step value is changed If the current setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will U2 step be rounded to the nearest available setting b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making adjustments to b2EV steps for exposure cntr shutter speed aperture exposure and flash compensation and E bracketing 1 3 step ox 1 2 step b3 Easy Exposure Compensation MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls whether the 4 button is needed to set exposure compensation 40 112 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will flash even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set b
25. gt setup menu Display roll and pitch information based on information from the camera tilt sensor Ifthe camera is tilted neither left nor right the roll reference line will turn green while if the camera is tilted neither forward nor back the pitch reference line will turn green and a dot will appear in the center of the display Each division is equivalent to 5 Camera level Camera tilted left or Camera tilted forward right or back Y Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back If the camera is unable to measure tilt the amount of tilt will not be displayed See Also For information on viewing a roll indicator in the viewfinder see Custom Setting f2 Assign Fn button 242 243 For information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view see pages 55 and 62 258 AF Fine tune MENU button gt 9 setup menu Fine tune focus for up to 12 lens types AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus use only when required Option Description AF fine tune On Turn AF tuning on On Off e Off Turn AF tuning off Move focal Tune AF for the current lens CPU lenses only point away Current Press A or W to choose a value between 20 and from camera value Saved value 20 Values for up to 12 lens types can be stored AF fine tune Only one value can be stored for each type of lens Lak
26. to lock both focus and exposure an AE L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder Focus will remain locked while the ae AE L AF L button is pressed even if you later remove your finger from the shutter release button AF S focus mode Focus locks automatically when the in focus indicator appears and remain i AE L AF L button locked until you remove your finger from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the art AE L AF L button see above toalr 6 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots if you keep the shutter release button pressed halfway AF S or keep the aft AE L AF L button pressed allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also See Custom setting c1 Shutter release button AE L A 226 for information on using the shutter release button to lock exposure Custom Setting f4 Assign AE L AF L button M 244 for information on choosing the role played by the fet AE L AF L button 102 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus non AF NIKKOR lenses or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results Q 98 e AF S lenses Set the lens focus mode switch to M e AFlenses Set
27. 63 64 HDMI If the camera is connected to an HDMI device M 204 the view through the lens will appear both in the camera monitor and on the HDMI device The indicators that appear in the HDMI device during movie recording are shown at right The camera monitor does not show the sound level or virtual horizon indicators in the monitor and on the HDMI device can not be hidden or displayed using the iM button To use live view when the camera is connected to an HDMI CEC device select Off for HDMI gt Device control in the setup menu M 205 Remote Cords If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button A 248 the shutter release buttons on optional MC DC2 remote cords M 298 can be used to start movie live view and to start and end movie recording V Recording Movies Flicker banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame for information on reducing flicker and banding see Flicker reduction M 252 Jagged edges color fringing moir and bright spots may also appear Bright bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright momentary light source When recording movies avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other s
28. B i ome white border or No border and press to select and exit to the previous menu Highlight Printer default use current printer settings Print time stamp Time a i stamp print times and dates of recording on photos or No time stamp and press 6 to select and exit to the previous menu This option is available only if supported by the printer To exit without cropping highlight No cropping and press 6 To crop the current picture highlight Crop and press gt Selecting Crop displays the dialog shown at right Press iain Cropping QUAL to increase the size of the crop QE ISO to decrease Position the crop using the multi selector and press Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes 4 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press 6 OKIE Tira 198 Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 3 on page 196 i 100ND600 DSC_0 15 04 2012 10 02 MENU button 2 Choose an option PictBridge Highlight one of the following options and press gt Select date e Print select Select pictures for printing see e Select date Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a selected date e Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the DPOF print order option in th
29. Built in AF assist illuminator 223 Built in flash 0 39 143 288 B l Dissonantsi 78 79 BUTS tiisin 162 230 242 C Calendar playback uu 186 Camera Control Pro 2 298 Camera CONTIOIS ccsssecsesseeeeseees 92 Capture NX 2 94 251 253 298 as errr ee err errr er ree 205 Center weighted 0 109 226 Charging the battery 21 22 Choose color temp White balance esessssessseseeeeeesees 115 120 Choose image area 90 91 Choose start end point 69 CL mode shooting speed 229 Clean image Sensor sesseceeees 301 Clock battery scicsomasniwunecin 28 Cloudy White balance 115 Ol DST net n 293 Color Dalance cssecsessseceseseseees 268 Color outline ou eeeseseseseeseseeseeeees 275 Color sketch ou cesessssseseeseseeseseees 275 Color SO ACE ccccscsisecsicisscisvasiersviserive 217 Color temperature 115 116 120 Commander MOdE ccececseee 237 Compatible lenses eseseees 285 Compressed Type cssssecseceseees 94 COMPUTES csesessesesessescecseesseeseees 193 Connector for external MUICTOPN ONG wisstesscscsdscssseetsasosiasonsantess 2 Continuous high speed 6 83 Continuous low speed 6 83 229 Continuous release mode 6 83 Continuous servo AF 97 221 Control PANe eeeseseesssesseseeseeeees 7 COPY IMAGE S csesessecsssecseeseeeess 209 Copyright ss ses
30. JPG TTT a BB image drea eeniagpsisionirrsiaira 89 a 6 ms D Time of recording eseessesessssssssssssssssssseseees 27 253 pJ Date of recording ssesessessessessrssrssreene 27 253 11 Current card Slots 46 178 12 Folder NaMe siinus 215 13 File MANNIE csidiccsnasardesantoaticieadaueanctent 216 1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options M 209 2 If photograph was taken using AF S or with single servo autofocus selected during AF A display shows point where focus first locked If photograph was taken using AF C or with continuous servo autofocus selected during AF A focus point is only displayed if option other than auto area AF was selected for AF area mode and camera was able to focus 3 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format M 63 89 179 180 EE Highlights l J Image highlights Folder number frame number 2 215 E Current channel RGB Highlights E sSelect R G B 1 Flashing areas indicate highlights areas that may be overexposed for the current channel Hold amp amp ISO button and press lt or to cycle through channels as follows RGB gj R G B all channels red green blue Qm ISO button 2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format M 63 89 EE RGB Histogram White balance sensns 115 Color temperature ss sssesssesssessessscessessses
31. Ore CQ PAT OK BY 267 Color Balance MENU button gt c retouch menu aada ada Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms M 181 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Increase amount of green Cancel MSave Ka Create retouched copy Increase amount of blue 4 ey Increase amount of magenta B Increase amount of amber Zoom To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor press amp QUAL The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the image displayed in the monitor While the image is Zoomed in press Yon WB to toggle back and forth between color balance and zoom When zoom is selected you can zoom in and out with the amp QUAL and amp ISO and scroll the image with the multi selector Cancel OK PENG 268 Image Overlay MENU button gt 4 retouch menu Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals the results which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging application The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size 1 93 95 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of
32. Press A or W to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted folder Press Qk to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder File Naming MENU button gt shooting menu Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see page 135 Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images JPG for JPEG images MOV for movies and NDF for dust off reference data In each pair of photographs recorded at image quality settings of NEF RAW JPEG the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions 216 Auto Distortion Control MENU button gt shooting menu Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide Emamma angle lenses and to reduce pin cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses note that the edges of the area visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph and that the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase This option does not apply to movies and is available only with type G and D lens
33. Q 236 you will need to set the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to TTL or AA Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as follows Flash unit Flash mode Metered area Stand alone flash unit 5 mm circle in center of frame Area metered by flash exposure meter i TTL Entire f Used with other flash units ntre trame Advanced Wireless Lighting Area metered by flash exposure meter See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or art AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f3 Assign preview button M 244 or Custom Setting f4 Assign AE L AF L button M 244 Other Shooting Options Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to H button default values by holding the amp amp ISO and 4 buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off briefly while settings are reset Qm ISO button Option Image quality JPEG normal 93 White balance 115 HOR high dynamic range 139 ISO sensitivity settings ISO sensitivity Auto and scene modes AUTO ff 1 105 PSAM S Auto ISO sensitivity control 107 Interval timer shooting 164 Autofocus viewfinder Autofocusmode O O oa O O AF area mode 9 11 Al Hi Single point AF E Mig Auto area AF 151 152 B Option Autofocus live view movie
34. S A or M 1 112 4 button Main command dial Control panel Activate or cancel bracketing select number of shots in bracketing sequence mode P S A or M 153 BKT button Main command dial Control panel Select bracketing increment mode P S A or M 1 154 BE White Balance BKT button Sub command dial re Ee EA aF Control panel Choose a white balance option mode P S A or M M 115 bd ISO Yo WB button Main command dial Control panel Fine tune white balance E 4 117 set color temperature a 120 or choose a white on CTS gt balance preset M 121 in mode eS PS P S A or M Mae KEA Yo WB button Sub command dial Control panel 15 EE Flash Settings Choose a flash mode M 144 Set flash compensation mode P S A or M A 148 16 4 id button Sub command dial Control panel The BM 14 Monitor Cover A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is notin use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cover hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom
35. Shutter release button AE L 226 Assign Fn button c2 Standby timer 3 Self timer 227 Assign preview button 227 Assign AE L AF L button c4 Monitor off delay 228 Customize command dials c5 Remote on duration 228 Release button to use dial d Shooting display Slot empty release lock d1 228 Reverse indicators d2 Viewfinder grid display 229 Assign MB D14 button d3 ISO display and adjustment 229 g Movie d4 Screen tips 229 Assign Fn button d5 CL mode shooting speed 229 Assign preview button d6 Max continuous release 230 Assign AE L AF L button d7 File number sequence 230 Assign shutter button d8 Information display 231 Note Depending on camera settings some items may be grayed out and unavailable For information on the options available in each shooting mode see page 309 If settings in the current bank have been modified from default values M 313 an asterisk will be displayed adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu 220 Reset Custom Settings MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values Reset custom settings m 313 a1 AF C Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When AF C is selected for viewfinder photography M 97 this option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority or only when the camera is in foc
36. The options available are the same as those listed for Group A above Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same channel Group B Channel 237 Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in flash is ct fer hitin fi Choose the flash control mode and output level for the G built in flash Note that output level can not be adjusted aa te in mode Group B By Channel 2 Adjust settings for group A Flash a iu built in flash Choose the flash control mode and output level for the G flash units in group A c Group B Channel 3 Adjust settings for group B Flash aii t built in flash Choose the flash control mode and output level for the hes flash units in group B Built in flash Group A Group B Channel 4 Select the channel Flash entrl for built in flash Commander mode KA Built in flash Group A Group B Channel 5 Press 6R 238 6 Compose the shot Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions 5m 15 ft or Wireless remote sensors 60 or less A on flash units should face 10m 33 ft orless 30 or less less camera j _ y n Camera built in flash 30 orless A built in flash 4 g N 5 m 15 ft or less 60 orless 7 Conf
37. To preview the effects of aperture press and hold the ngA depth of field preview button The lens will be 4 stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes P and or the value chosen by the user modes A and M allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Depth of field preview button Custom Setting e5 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the built in flash and optional flash units such as the SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 M 293 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 241 for more information 7 M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set to x Zan orto values between 30 s and 4 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure hut amp A 79 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Use the exposure indicators to check exposure Shutter speed Aperture E7777 7777 ag o C i R E In s0 faal uk E Main command dial Sub command dial AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set ape
38. a i Be w eliFlashsyncspeed v v v v VV Vv VY e2 Flash shutterspeed v v CT d KA l G a E Optional flash ef Exposure comp forflash v v eS Modelingflash v v e6 Auto bracketing v v e7 Bracketing order v v f1 OK button shooting mode Y 7 f Assignpreviewbuttion V v v v v v v v v fa Assign AEAF L button V V7 V v v v v v v f5 Customize command dias V v Vv v v v v viv 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 g4 Assign shutter button Y 1 Reset with Reset shooting menu M 214 2 Reset with two button reset M 151 3 Fixed at Auto 4 Auto ISO sensitivity control is not available 5 Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting 6 Reset with Reset custom settings N 221 311 Defaults The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed below For information on two button resets see page 151 EE Playback Menu Defaults Option Option Default M Playback folder Slide show Image review Still images and Image type After delete movies Rotate al Option Option File naming Vignette control Role played by card in Slot 2 Overflow Long exposure NR Image quality High ISO NR Image size Large ISO sensitivity settings Image area E sensitivity Auto DX crop o s psan mw jy KBSA JPEG compression Size priority Auto ISO sensit
39. button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder Main command dial 0 EV 4 button pressed At values other than 0 0 the 0 at the center of the exposure ma indicators will flash modes P S and A only and a I icon will be am a displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release ce the 4 button The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the G4 button AF A NORM WB A Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Mode M In mode M exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator shutter speed and aperture do not change Using a Flash When a flash is used exposure compensation affects both flash level and exposure altering the brightness of both the main subject and the background Custom Setting e4 Exposure comp for flash 240 can be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the background only See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl N 224 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the 4 button see Custom Setting b3 Easy exposure compensation M 225 For information on automatically varying exposure f
40. e Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns e Using the flash close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject N Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not short or disassemble the battery e Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged e Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards e Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat e Do not immerse in or expose to water e Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins e Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains e When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place e The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the
41. lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in modes A aperture priority auto and M manual when aperture can only be adjusted using the lens aperture ring Selecting any other mode disables the shutter release Non CPU Lenses lt 1 285 Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu M 172 when anon CPU lens is attached the current f number will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops 4AF with maximum aperture displayed as 4AF and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring 73 74 Shutter Speed and Aperture Two of the chief factors in determining exposure are shutter speed and aperture By slowing shutter speed while increasing aperture or increasing shutter speed while reducing aperture you can achieve different effects while keeping exposure constant Fast shutter speeds and large apertures freeze moving objects and soften background details while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and bring out background details Shutter speed Aperture ar A C i AF A NORM WB A Fast shutter speed Slow shutter speed Large aperture f 5 6 Small aperture f 22 1
42. positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple s uawijsnf pe jenuew Filter Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs Choose effects from Off yellow orange red and green M 133 Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B amp W black and Toning white Sepia Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow Green Kjuo aWOsYyOUOW AjUO woiypouow uou s uawijsnipe jenuew Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple M 133 V A Auto Results for auto sharpening contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type G or D lens for best results Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based 132 The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 8 ISO button in Step 2 on page 131 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the Q ISO button to return to the Picture Control menu Contrast The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Cont
43. randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be displayed in the following instances the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicate a malfunction e The ambient temperature is high e The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies e The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods If live view does not start when you press the amp button wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again Choosing a Picture Control P S A and M Modes Only Pressing A E during live view displays a list of Picture Controls Highlight the desired Picture Control and press gt to adjust Picture Control settings M 129 EAaCancel Adjust E button Movies Movie recording is not available during live view photography and pressing the movie record button has no effect Select movie live view M 57 to shoot movies Focusing in Live View To focus using autofocus rotate the focus mode Focus mode selector selector to AF and follow the steps below to choose autofocus and AF area modes For information on focusing manually see page 55 EE Choosing a Focus Mode The following autofocus modes are available in live view Mode Description Single servo AF For stationary subjects Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed halfway Full time servo AF For moving subjects Camera focuses continuously until shutter
44. shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills 00 See page 335 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer d7 File Number Sequence MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by a7 File number sequence adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or anew memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or anew memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from On the largest file number in the current folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or anew memory card is inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs As for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding Reset one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 Off File Number Sequence If the current folder is nu
45. signal strength is insufficient Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where wireless devices are prohibited When an Eye Fi card is inserted its status is indicated by an icon in the information display Eye Fi upload disabled Eye Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload aie EAD static Eye Fi upload enabled waiting to begin upload T so Dimatea Eye Fi upload enabled uploading data e amp Error camera can not control Eye Fi card If a flashing Ar amp appears in the aa panel or viewfinder refer to page 324 if this indicator is not flashing pictures can be taken normally but you may be unable to change Eye Fi settings oj j m Eye Fi Cards Eye Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected If a warning is displayed in the monitor M 324 turn the camera off and remove the card See the manual provided with the Eye Fi card and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer The camera can be used to turn Eye Fi cards on and off but may not support other Eye Fi functions Supported Eye Fi Cards As of December 2011 the camera supports 8 GB SDHC Pro X2 Eye Fi cards Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions consult the manufacturer for more information Eye Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase Be sure the Eye Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version Using Eye Fi Cards in Ad Hoc
46. 4 connect the AC adapter Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter 3 and the EP 5B power cable to the DC socket A icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector 299 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period replace the monitor cover remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After Camera using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly body dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to
47. 57 or while HDR is in effect M 139 i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400 At values over 6400 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure The SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction while the SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination with the following restrictions e SB 910 and SB 900 AF assist illumination is available coo09Go0000 000080000 2 with 17 135 mm AF lenses however autofocus is 00000800000 oooegoooo 000tp tta available only with the focus points shown at 17 19mm 20 105 mm 106 135 mm right SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 AF assist illumination is available with 24 105 mm AF lenses however autofocus is available only with the focus points shown at right SB 700 AF assist illumination is availab
48. 600S 76 s Remember the higher the f number the smaller the aperture P Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter soeed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture Flexible Program In mode P different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial while the exposure meters are on flexible program Rotate the dial to the right for AF Z large apertures low f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Main command dial Rotate the dial to the left for small apertures high f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect a la indicator appears in the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off See Also See page 315 for information on the built in exposure program For information on activating the exposure meters see The Standby Timer on page 39 75 76 S Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed wh
49. AE L AF L button is pressed i and remains locked until the button is pressed a second a time or the standby timer expires AF fe Focus locks while the at AE L AF L button is pressed AF ON The aft AE L AF L button initiates autofocus The shutter release button can not be used to focus Press the art AE L AF L button to lock flash value built in FVlock flash and compatible optional flash units only M 149 294 Press again to cancel FV lock None _ Pressing the button has no effect 244 f5 Customize Command Dials MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials e Reverse rotation Reverse the direction of rotation of the 5 Customize command dials r Reverse rotation command dials when they are used to make adjustments to a Exposure compensation and or Shutter speed aperture Highlight options and press the multi selector right to select or deselect then highlight Done and press 6 This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D14 e Change main sub If Off is selected the main command dial 5 Customize command dials controls shutter speed and the sub command dial controls eer aperture Select On Mode A to use the main command dial On to select aperture in shooting mode A On to use the main eali Saha command dial to select aperture in modes A and M and the sub command dial to select shutter speed in modes S and M This setting also
50. Also See page 325 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or P to view additional pictures Press the amp QUAL button to zoom in on the current frame M 187 press gt to exit zoom To view six lt a pictures at a time press the amp amp ISO button Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press amp QUAL to display the highlighted picture full frame to view images in other locations when thumbnails are displayed hold the BKT button press A and select the desired card and folder as described on page 178 1 100ND600 DSC_O 15 04 2012 10 02 2 Display printing options Setup Start printing Press to display PictBridge printing options araa No of copies Border Time stamp P Cropping 197 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press gt to select Option Description Highlight a page size only sizes supported by the current printer are listed Page size and press to select and exit to the previous menu to print at the default page size for the current printer select Printer default No of Press A or W to choose number of copies maximum 99 then press to copies select and return to the previous menu This option is available only if supported by the printer Highlight Printer default use current printer settings Print with border print photo with
51. Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life c5 Remote on Duration MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the camera will remain on stand by in remote RSME release mode M 85 If no operations are performed for the l CA E selected period remote shooting will end and the exposure Er m meters will turn off Choose shorter times for longer battery life To reactivate remote control mode after the timer has expired press the camera shutter release button halfway d Shooting Display d1 Beep MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses using single servo AF AF S or when single servo AF is selected for AF A A 97 when focus locks during live view photography while the release timer is counting down in self timer and delayed remote release modes M 85 when a photograph is taken in quick response remote or remote mirror up mode M 85 when time lapse photography ends M 168 or if you attempt to take a photograph when the memory card is locked M 32 Note that a beep will not sound in movie live view CQ 57 or quiet shutter release mode mode Q M 83 regardless of the option selected e Volume Choose 3 high 2 medium 1 low or Off mute When an option other than Off is selected appears in the information display e Pitch Choose High or Low wm SON OF ON amp DO OOF 52 Ae 0 d2 Vie
52. Connect to high definition device choose cable with connector for HDMI device N Q D A Connect to camera 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel 4 Turn the camera on and press the gt button During playback images will be displayed on the television screen Close the Connector Cover Close the camera connector cover when the connectors are not in use Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer Television Playback Use of an EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately is recommended for extended playback The TV will display images full screen if photo information is hidden during full frame playback M 179 Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen Audio Stereo sound recorded with optional ME 1 21 298 stereo microphones plays in stereo when movies are viewed on HDMI devices using a camera connected via an HDMI cable note that audio will not be played back over headphones connected to the camera Volume can be adjusted using television controls the camera controls can not be used 204 EE HDMI Options The HDMI option in the setup menu M 249 controls output resolution and can be used to enable the camera for remote control from devices that support HDMI CEC High Definition Multimedia Interface Consumer Electronics Control a standard that allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which
53. File naming Role played by card in Slot 2 v_ Image quality Image size 10K Image area Choose position Image size Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording f2 Assign Fn button SOK 4 5 Add more items Add items Shooting menu The items currently displayed in My Menu I Reset shooting menu g g Storage folder are indicated by a check mark Items r A Role played by card in Slot 2 indicated by a N icon can not be selected E ino uiy v Image size Image area Repeat steps 1 4 to select additional items EE Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu highlight Remove items and press P 2 Select items Remove ite one Highlight items and press gt to select or 7 i QO Image quality deselect Selected items are indicated by a C JPEG compression CO NEF RAW recording check mark Ho 2Assian Fn button 3 Select Done Remove items a Highlight Done and press 68 A G4 Image size i O Image quality confirmation dialog will be displayed C JPEG compression O NEF RAW recording O 2Assign Fn button 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected items O Delete selected item Yes Cancel Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the T r button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press t m again to remove the selected item from My Menu 281 282 EE Reordering Options in
54. Focal length non CPU lenses esscssesseeeees 172 Color t MPerature ceecseceseseseseseseeees 115 120 3 Color temperature indicator ccesesecseseeseees 120 6 Aperture Stop Indicator c cscesssecseseees 73 288 TA Aperture f number uu eeessseeseseeseeseseesees 77 78 Aperture number of stops eesseeeeees 73 288 Bracketing increment csccssesseeseeeeseees 154 155 Number of shots in ADL bracketing SEQUENCE sanninna 158 Maximum aperture non CPU lenses 174 Release MOGC ccsssssssssssscsssssssssecseesessssecseesees Continuous shooting speed Exposure indicator sssesesessesessesecsesscsesseseescesees Exposure compensation display sess0 112 Bracketing progress indicator Exposure and flash bracketing 153 WB bracketing s sssssessssseeessssseessssseessseeessssse 156 HDR indicatOlsssssncssnsnnna 140 HDR exposure differential csssssessesseeseees 140 11 Camera battery indicator s ssssseessssseresssssssssssee 35 MB D14 battery type display csseseeseeees 232 H MB D14 battery indicator ssssssersessssssssecess 232 K appears when memory remains for over H 1000 exposures sss sssesssessssesssesssessseesssessseossessse 36 1L Number of exposures remaining sssssessssseesse 36 Time lapse recording indicatol ssesesseee 170 Manual lens number c csesssseese
55. For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the self timer and remote control are used see Custom Setting d1 Beep M 228 87 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended 1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to Mup 2 Raise the mirror Frame the picture focus and then press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror Mirror Up While the mirror is raised photos can not be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed 3 Takea picture Press the shutter release button all the way down again to take a picture To prevent Ca blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord M 298 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised See Also For information on using the optional ML L3 remote control for mirror up photography see page 85 88 Image Recording Options Image Area Choose the aspect ratio and angle of view image area Thanks to the camera s FX format 35 9 x 24 mm image sensor you can choose from angles of view as wide as those supported by 35 mm 135 for
56. JPEG images Option Description Size priority Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size Optimal quality Optimal image quality File size varies with scene recorded EE NEF RAW Recording gt Type Choose the type of compression for NEF RAW images eli Option Description ONS Lossless NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm reducing compressed file size by about 20 40 with no effect on image quality NEF images are compressed using a non reversible algorithm ON Compressed reducing file size by about 35 55 with almost no effect on image quality EE NEF RAW Recording gt NEF RAW Bit Depth Choose a bit depth for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit 12 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits producing 14 bit 14 bit files larger than those with a bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data recorded NEF RAW Images NEF RAW images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2 available separately Q 298 or ViewNX 2 available on the supplied ViewNX 2 CD Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images when viewed on a computer NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large fEl size images in the table on page 95 JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu M 271
57. Mode Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye Fi cards that support ad hoc mode Set Custom Setting c2 Standby timer A 227 to 30 s or longer Firmware Version MENU button gt 9 setup menu View the current camera firmware version 260 c4 The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies To display the retouch menu press MENU and select the r retouch menu tab 5 0 RETOUCH MENU RETOUCH MENU D Lighting E D Lighting Red eye correction 7 Red eye correction Trim Trim gt Monochrome Monochrome Filter effects l oN G Filter effects Color balance be E Color balance Image overlay Image overlay D NEF RAW processing NEF RAW processing Iso MENU button The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of existing pictures The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera note that if the memory card is being used to store both RAW NEF and JPEG copies of the same photographs as described on page 93 retouch other than Image overlay and NEF RAW processing apply only to the JPEG copies Option aa Option AA EF D Lighting 264 a Straighten 274 Red eye correction 264 C9 Distortion control 274 Trim 265 KS Fisheye 274 LE Monochrome 266 Ly Color outline 275 Filter effects 267 Ry Color sketch 275 dol Color balance 268 Al Perspective control 275 Cah Image overlay 269 Miniature effec
58. My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu highlight Rank items and press P 2 Select an item Highlight the item you wish to move and press X 3 Position the item Press Aor V to move the item up or down in My Menu and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items 4 Exit to My Menu Press the MENU button to return to My Menu MENU button Rank items Image quality NORM JPEG compression Hs NEF RAW recording 42 Assign Fn button E OKNAL Rank items Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording t2 Assign Fn button es New OK 0 4 MY MENU Assign Fn button Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording E Add items Remove items Rank items P Choose tab Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings select E Recent settings for f My Menu gt Choose tab 1 Select Choose tab a MY MENU S f2 Assign Fn button In My Menu FZ highlight Choose tab and Image quality JPEG compression press gt gt NEF RAW recording E Add items Remove items Rank items ti Choose tab 2 Select Recent settings Choose tab Highlight Recent settings and press The name of the menu will change from MY lt gt MENU to RECENT SETTINGS ET Recent settings m Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used To view My Menu again select My Menu for Recent settings gt Cho
59. OU ea E eee atetuerste outhouses eens 273 SEN AU EMA ra E E EN E AA 274 Distortion CONTOR oaii e A A S 274 FISC araa A N 274 Color OUNO ienna a eran arene nee I 275 Color SS erent coc ces tect veet penane cnn eee et norco nace se outces AAE 275 Perspective CONTIOL uu cesssssesessccsesesssscscsesecscsesesscscscseseeseseseseesescaeseseeseseseseeseacacseeseees 275 Mimiatare EN SCE ssn E 276 ECVE COLO arra N T A OA 277 Side by side Comparison scsscscsscscsssssscscsscssssscessscsesssscessscssassecasssessassecassscasseeseaes 279 Te My Menu E Recent Settings se sessseesossseesssssecssssssecessssccessssscesssseceeossseeeosssserossseeee 280 Recent Setting Sessien aaa tase AEAEE 283 Technical Notes 285 Compatible POMS ES ease 285 Optional Flash Units Speedlights ssesosesseesseeseessesssessesssesseessesseesecoseeseesseossesseossesss 292 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS s ssseesssessseessseesseessseessessseeosseesseessseossse 293 Other ACCESSOriES sicssssesectctosssectusatabiessdatvasbacsecusatonnsdierseardisansioraesinenbubtestucvaceiatenminslens 297 Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter e ssseessseesseesssessseessseesssersseessseesss 299 Caring for the CaMeEra eeesssesssessseesseesseesseesseeeneeeseceeceeeesseesstesseroseeoseesseesseeoseeoseeeseeesereseees 300 OI a e EE E E Sete reer eee 300 E a aTa E E E IE EAE ee een EAE PAA A EEA E S E TT 300 The Low Pass FILS cassssezecucesessac
60. S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II AF S VR Micro Nikkor 105mm f 2 8G IF ED AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 200mm f 2G ED VR II AF 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 200 400mm f 4G ED VR II AF S 500mm f 4D ED II AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED AF S 500mm f 4D ED AF S NIKKOR 300mm f 2 8G ED VR II AF 500mm f 4D ED AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II AF S 600mm f 4D ED II AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED AF S 600mm f 4D ED AF 300mm f 2 8D ED AF I 600mm f 4D ED Autofocus not supported f 8 Autofocus Support If the lens can be used with the AF S AF I TC 20E 000 O009000000 teleconverter and has a maximum aperture of f 4 TG 17EM o00000000 TC 20E Il the apparent aperture will drop by two stops to f 8 esac TC 20E I when the lens is used with a TC 20E TC 20E II TC 20E Ill teleconverter or by one and a half stops to f 6 8 when the lens is used with a TC 17E Il The focus points shown in the illustrations can be used for autofocus and electronic rangefinding when an AF S teleconverter is attached When used with TC 20E TC 20E II TC 20E IIl focus data for focus points other than the center focus point are obtained from line sensors Single point AF is used when 3D tracking or auto area AF is selected for AF area mode M 99 at maximum or combined apertures slower than f 5 6 the camera may not b
61. a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains Monitor wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Lens mirror and viewfinder Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals M Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced 300 The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off HE Clean Now 1 Select Clean image sensor in the set
62. accord with local regulations Available Settings The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode a N i A Storage folder Viv vv viv VV v viv vivid vvv v v vv v vvv v v vv v NEF RAW recording Whitebalance SS Ww w Set Picture Control WW 3 Zvi 7 2 HDR high dynamicrang gt Ww Zv v ACAK Muktiple exposure Ww Time lapse photography AF area mode viewfinder oS OCTET a Live view movie cae ee 5 Ea 5 CARA 5 Meteng SSS v pw a aaa Exposure compensation v v Braden o oe Pw Flashmode SSS WS Ww o aa Flash compensation v v Fock SSW Lv tw tv fl a l r 309 310 A 1 0 WO sN Shu AUTO O al AEC priority selection V v a2 AF S priorityselection V v v v v v v v 7 Focus poi v v vv v v 7 7 v bT ISO sensitivity step value V V V v b2 EV steps for exposure cnt V V b3 Easy exposure compensation b Center weightedarea 7 7 7 c amp Monitoroffdelay c5 Remoteon duration V v 7 7 7 7 d6 Max continuous release V v d7 File number sequence V V dit Flashwaming v y d12 MB Di4batterytype V v v v v v v v 7 Y v Y Vv Vv Vv EA ka EZ KA Vv Vv aed Ea Ka Ka EA Vv Vv KA Ka Ka Ka Vv Vv Vv EA KA Ka E Vv KA UN TNSNN INN NNN NY NNN YNI TAINAN SANSS SG l cielo
63. aperture If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and the lens Note that lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted Select Done Highlight Done and press 68 The specified focal length and aperture will be stored under the chosen lens number Non CPU lens data Done Lens number Focal length mm Maximum aperture 173 174 To recall lens data when using a non CPU lens 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number for Custom Setting f2 Assign Fn button M 242 or Custom Setting f3 Assign preview button M 244 2 Use the selected control to choose the lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel Focal length Maximum aperture e Lens number D paa Fn button Main command dial Control panel The GP 1 GPS Unit The GP 1 GPS unit available separately can be connected to the camera s accessory terminal M 298 using
64. aperture of the lens See Also See page 149 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on auto FP high speed sync and choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 234 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed 235 For information on flash control and using the built in flash in commander mode see Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash A 236 See page 292 for information on using optional flash units 147 148 Flash Compensation P S A and M Modes Only Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from 3 EV to 1 EV in increments of 3EV changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections Press the button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel In general choose positive values to make the main subject brighter negative values to make it darker button Sub command dial At values other than 0 0 a 4 icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the Hi4 button The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the y 4 butto
65. applies to the command dials for the MB D14 e Aperture setting If Sub command dial is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached e Menus and playback If Off is selected the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On or On image review excluded is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or down The sub command dial is used to display additional photo information in full frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback Select On image review excluded to prevent the command dials from being used for playback during image review While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press or 6 245 2
66. asterisk p Standard evr Vivid EPT Portrait FAILS Landscape CEGrid Adjust 131 EE Picture Control Settings Option Description Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral or Monochrome Picture Controls Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening Sharpening ae ee according to the type of scene or choose from values between no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening salen A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight Quick adjust higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced brightness Does not Brightness sjo1 U0 34N D1q IlL sjuawjsn pe ball Ee affect exposure Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make reds more purple blues more green and greens more yellow
67. auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 250 s Auto FP high speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached M 294 If the built in flash or other flash units are used shutter speed is set 1 200 s i 1 i Auto FP to 200 s When the camera shows a shutter speed of 200 s in mode P or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 200 s 1 200 s 1 60s Flash sync speed set to selected value Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in mode S or M select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30 s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Auto FP High Speed Sync Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight The information display flash mode indicator shows FP when 234 auto FP high speed sync is active 1 295 BE Auto FP High Speed Sync When 1 250 s Auto FP or 1 200 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 234 the built in flash can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 250 s or 1 200 s while compatible optional flash units A 294 can be used at any shutter speed Auto FP High Speed Sync 1 250
68. automatic or manual focus 101 or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing M 102 Autofocus To use autofocus rotate the focus mode selector to AF Focus mode selector Autofocus Mode Choose from the following autofocus modes Mode Description AF A Auto servo AF Camera automatically selects single servo autofocus if subject is stationary continuous servo autofocus if subject is moving Single servo AF For stationary subjects Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed AF S halfway At default settings shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Q 221 Continuous servo AF For moving subjects Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button is pressed halfway if subject moves camera will engage predictive focus AF C tracking Q 100 to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority Q 221 Predictive Focus Tracking In AF C mode or when continuous servo autofocus is selected in AF A mode the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released 97 98 Autofocus mode can be selected by pressing
69. be locked at the value metered in a 4 mm 0 16 in circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 12 mm circle in the center of the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered value for exposure Mode Setting Shutter speed and aperture flexible program M 75 Shutter speed Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that metering can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L M 226 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the fet AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f4 Assign AE L AF L button M 244 111 112 Exposure Compensation P S A and M Modes Only Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker It is most effective when used with center weighted or spot metering M 109 Choose from values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 3 EV In general positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker 1 EV No exposure compensation 1 EV To choose a value for exposure compensation press the 54 E4 button
70. camera off and allow the battery to cool e Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation Observe proper precautions when handling the charger e Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire e Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock e Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC to AC inverters Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire N Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations N CD ROM
71. ceessesecssessecsssecssseeseesees 5 Mode dial lock release 5 Modeling flash cscssessecseseseees 241 MONItOL cccceceees 46 49 177 250 Monitor brightness sceee 250 Monitor COVES ssessessessessseseeseesesseesees 17 Monitor off delay ssseseeees 228 Monitor pre flash 146 149 MONnOchromMe ccsesecseseeeees 129 266 Movie live view 57 247 248 Movie quality Movie settings 65 Movie SCTLINGS scscssssssessscssererers 65 Movie record button 58 MOVIES cssessessesseseeseesees 57 247 248 Multiple exposure cseeeeees 160 My MenU snssessesssesseessessesssessesssesseese 280 N NEF RAW 0000 93 94 216 271 NEF RAW bit depth 94 NEF RAW processing 00 271 NEF RAW recording ssecse0e 94 Neutral Set Picture Control 129 Nikon Transfer 2 000 193 194 Non CPU lens 172 285 288 Non CPU lens data 172 Normal area AF ceesssseseeseeees 52 Number of focus points 223 Number of Shots 337 0 OK button shooting mode 241 Optimal quality JPEG COMPSeSSION esesssssessssseeseseesees 94 Optional flash eee 237 292 Output resolution HDMIl 205 Overflow Role played by card in DIOL 2 bahwaievinammten aun welies 96 Overview ata ceceessesecseseseeeees 184 P Page size PictBridge 06 198 Perspective CONTIOL eseceeseee 275 Photo in
72. date Press A or W to highlight a date gt To view the pictures taken on the highlighted date press amp amp ISO Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures or press and hold amp QUAL to view the current picture full screen Press QS ISO to return to the date list ISO button Select the highlighted date Press to select all pictures taken on the highlighted date Selected dates are marked with a M icon Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional dates to deselect a date highlight it and press gt Press to complete the operation A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press Delete 3 images Ys Mo Delete Bow Selected Select date gt ALL All Select date O 15 04 2012 EEO O 16 04 2012 O 18 04 2012 Ea OST Teme OK 10 4 Select date gt 15 04 2012 G 100ND600 Tae gaat ey ey wey _ CE Back G3Zoom GSet Select date gt m 15 04 2012 Fas O 16 04 2012 Fa 18 04 2012 EA QEL OK 0 Delete all images taken on selected date Ys o CE 191 192 Connections Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to use the supplied UC E15 USB cable to connect the camera to a computer Before Connecting the Camera Before connecting the camera install the software on the supplied ViewNX 2 CD To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera EN EL
73. default Low Off Long exposure On NR Off default High ISO NR High Normal default Low Off ISO sensitivity ISO sensitivity settings ISO 105 Remote control Delayed remote default mode Quick response remote Remote mirror up Multiple Multiple exposure mode exposure Number of shots Auto gain Eger Auto ISO sensitivity control Choose start time Now Start time Interval Select no of timesxno of shots Start Start Interval Shooting time Movie settingsgp Frame size frame rate Movie quality Microphone Destination Interval timer shooting Time lapse photography 1 Not available if no custom Picture Controls are present 2 Defaults to Off modes P S A M A Hi and M or Auto other modes CUSTOM SETTING MENU 11219 Reset custom Yes settings No a Autofocus al AF C priority Release default selection Focus a2 AF S priority Release selection Focus default a3 Focus 5 Long tracking with 4 lock on 3 Normal default 2 1 Short off a4 AF point Auto default illumination On Off a5 Focus point Wrap wrap around No wrap default a6 Numberof 39 points default focus points 11 points a7 Built in AF On default assist Off illuminator vi b Metering exposure ISOsensitivity 1 3 step b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 c Timers AE lock c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 step value EV steps for exposure cntrl Easy exposure compensation Center weighted are
74. delayed remote mode the self timer lamp will light for two seconds followed by the red eye reduction lamp which light for one second before the shutter is released Focusing in Remote Control Mode The camera will not adjust focus in remote mirror up mode or when continuous servo autofocus is selected note however that if any autofocus mode is selected you can focus by pressing the camera shutter release button halfway before shooting pressing the button all the way down will not release the shutter If auto or single servo autofocus is selected or the camera is in live view in delayed or quick response remote mode the camera will automatically adjust focus before shooting if the camera is unable to focus in viewfinder photography it will return to stand by without releasing the shutter Remote Mirror up Mode Metering is not performed in remote mirror up mode Photos can not be framed in the viewfinder while the mirror is raised Bah Dal Da Pal Time bulb exposures can not be recorded using the self timer A fixed shutter speed will be used if a speed of turk tis selected in mode M See Also For information on choosing the duration of the self timer the number of shots taken and the interval between shots see Custom Setting c3 Self timer A 227 For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand by mode waiting for a signal from the remote control see Custom Setting c5 Remote on duration A 228
75. dial to choose a lens number a specified using the Non CPU lens data option M 172 Fn button performs same function as gt button Select when using a gt Playback telephoto lens or in other circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the gt button with your left hand None Pressing the button has no effect Viewfinder Virtual Horizon When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Custom Setting f2 Assign Fn button pressing the Fn button converts the exposure display in the viewfinder to a roll indicator Press the button again to restore the indicator to its normal function Camera tilted right Camera tilted left Viewfinder Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back For a display that shows both pitch and roll use the Virtual horizon option in the setup menu M 258 243 f3 Assign Preview Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button The options available are the same as for Assign Fn button CO 242 The default setting is Preview f4 Assign AE L AF L Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the at AE L AF L button Option Description a AE AF Focus and exposure lock while the art AE L AF L button is lock pressed AE lock En only Exposure locks while the art AE L AF L button is pressed AE lock Exposure locks when the it
76. empty e Folder is partially full e Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder The card on which the folder is stored is shown by the card slot icon in the top right corner of the Select folder by number dialog The card used for new folders depends on the option currently selected for Role played by card in slot 2 M 96 3 Save changes and exit Press k to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without choosing the storage folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Startup Time Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of files or folders 215 EE Selecting Folders from a List 1 Choose Select folder from list Storage folder Select folder from list Highlight Select folder from list and press gt 5 101ND600 102ND600 103ND600 2 Highlight a folder
77. for U1 or U2 to default values SETUP MENU Format memory card Save user settings 1 Select Reset user settings Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Reset user settings in the setup menu and press P 4 e Monitor brightness 0 Clean image sensor E Lock mirror up for cleaning Image Dust Off ref photo HDMI MENU button 2 Select Reset U1 or Reset U2 Reset user settings Highlight Reset U1 or Reset U2 and press P Reset U2 3 Reset user settings itt eis Highlight Reset and press 6 Cancel 82 Release Mode Choosing a Release Mode To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Mode S CL CH Q Mup Description Single frame Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release button is pressed Continuous low speed While shutter release button is held down camera records 1 5 frames per second Frame rate can be chosen using Custom Setting d5 CL mode shooting speed M 229 Note that only one picture will be taken if the flash fires Continuous high speed While shutter release button is held down camera records up to 5 5 frames per second Note that only one picture will be taken if the flash fires Quiet shutter release As for single frame except that mirror does not click back into place f while shutter release button is fully pressed allowing user to c
78. from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on 159 Multiple Exposure P S A and M Modes Only Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably superior to those in software generated photographic overlays BE Creating a Multiple Exposure Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view Exit live view before proceeding Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s extend the meter off delay using Custom Setting c2 Standby timer Q 227 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c2 If the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end 30 s after the exposure meters turn off and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point 1 Select Multiple exposure in the q a SHOOTING MENU Vignette control ON shooting menu 7 Long exposure NR OFF High ISO NR NORM Press the MENU button to display the menus l ISO sensitivity settings k Remote control mode 2s Highlight Multiple exposure in the A L P Interval timer shooting shooting menu and p
79. in the P Timelapse photography OFF shooting menu highlight Auto ISO MENU button sensitivity control and press P 2 Select On ISO sensitivity settings 5 Auto ISO sensitivity control Highlight On and press if Off is selected ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value On selected by the user EE 3 Adjust settings m TIE 100 a sensitivity The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity E EEE can be selected using Maximum sensitivity a Maximum sensitivity 6400 Minimum shutter speed AUTO the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100 note that if the value selected for Maximum sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used In modes P and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed 2000 1 s or Auto in modes S and M ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user If Auto available only with CPU lenses equivalent to 1 30 s when a non CPU lens is used is selected the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens auto shutter speed selection can be fine tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing for example even faster values than those usually selected automatically by the camera can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur Shutter
80. indicator scseesssssseeesessee 233 Battery indicator ccccsssssssssesccsseecsssssesssssecsesneecssese 35 5 RECEA E 144 WJ Autofocus mod s 97 TE E T ne E E E A 95 E mage quali is scorvtssinicrioisrnewnntcorsniimeciniteonaiorior 93 IK White balance fine tuning indicator 118 KO White balante ssssssscssssissscasasstinaspueinviastoncoantes 11 Aperture stop indicator Aperture f number sesessssesssssessssesssssessssess Aperture number of StODS c sseseeseeees 73 288 Bracketing inCreMent c ccsessescssseeseees 154 156 Number of shots in ADL bracketing Sequence cscsscscsssesssssssesssasacesssasaresasacaceconars 158 Number of shots per interval ccccseseesees 165 Maximum aperture non CPU lenses 174 PC mode INICATOT esessesssecsessssssssssecsecsees 195 KEJ Memory card indicator Slot 1 sss 30 96 GZ Memory card indicator Slot 2 sssssssseen 30 96 ISO Sensitivity indicator ssssssssssseesssssessssss 105 5 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator cccseseeee 108 Interval timer indicator s sssssssssssseeessseeessssee 166 ki Time lapse INGICATOF eecesesseseseesssteseeeseeesees 170 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 153 WB bracketing indicator csssseeseseeseesees 156 ADL bracketing indicatol csecsssesseseeseenees 158 24 Bracketing progress indicator 153 156 158 a Exposure compensation indicator
81. is locked M 32 Can not retouch picture Photo can not be further edited with this camera M 262 Can not change print order e Memory card is full delete pictures Q 36 189 e Memory card is locked M 32 Can not select photo for printing Photo is in NEF RAW format Create JPEG copy using NEF RAW processing or transfer to computer and print using ViewNX 2 supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately Picture is not displayed on TV e Choose correct video mode M 65 or output resolution M 205 e HDMI Q 204 cable is not correctly connected Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI CEC television e Select On for HDMI gt Device control in the setup menu M 205 e Adjust HDMI CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with the device Can not transfer photos to computer OS not compatible with camera or transfer software Use card reader to copy photos to computer M 193 Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2 Update to latest version M 298 Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low pass filter Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor clean
82. it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause 145 Shutter Speeds Available with the Built in Flash The following shutter speeds are available with the built in flash Shutter speed Shutter speed a P A 2 2 X 9 200 60 S 200 30 s 200 125 S 200 30 S bus hi 200 1 S Speeds as fast as 4 000 s are available with optional SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 flash units when 1 250 s Auto FP or 1 200 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 234 When 1 250 s Auto FP is selected shutter speeds as fast as 1 250 s are available with the built in flash Flash Control Mode The camera supports the following i TTL flash control modes e i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Flash emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 2 016 pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see M 172 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital S
83. lt 8 So 9 A gt Ona 10 Qre __ 1 2 button Exposure COMPENSATION ssssseseeeeesseseseees 112 Two button F SECl cssessesssssssssecseesssssseeseeess 151 BEY Movie record button ccssssssssssesssssssseesenssssssee 58 2 0 button MetetiMNi cissi 109 Formatting memory CAMS sccsesseceeeeeseesees 31 BEX Focal plane mark O cccsssssssseesessssssesesussee 103 Control panel ssssssssssssesrereressssssssssssrrrreesessssssssrrsrreees 7 Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera off EER Sailt i TASH siioni 143 2 Mi OF sieccssissrsinarinrnmnnantianaonamenion 88 303 BE Meter coupling lever scsssssssssessussssssseeesee 328 LENS MOUNTING MALK ccssessssecsssessseessseeesseesssees 26 ba4 button Flash ITOGE ssisscsiessstessstansstanescaae ecesissonsn cones ssvensecs 143 Flash COMPENSATION cccscecsesesssseeseeseseeeeees 148 BKT button k Bracketing s scscsssessssssssesscseeseeees 153 156 158 Infrared receiver front eserse 86 BR Built in microphone ou seesesssssseeesssssnsseeee 58 65 9 Audio Connector COVED cceseseeseseeseeeeseess 61 298 LCD IIluminators Rotating the power switch toward 8 activates the standby timer and control panel backlight LCD illuminator allowing the display to be read in the dark After the power switch is released and returns to the ON position the illuminators will remain lit for six sec
84. menu 214 Color space 217 Storage folder 215 Active D Lighting 137 File naming 216 HDR high dynamic range 139 Role played by card in Slot 2 96 Vignette control 218 Image quality 93 Long exposure NR 218 Image size 95 High ISONR 218 Image area 89 ISO sensitivity settings 105 JPEG compression 94 Remote control mode 85 NEF RAW recording 94 Multiple exposure 160 White balance 115 Interval timer shooting 164 Set Picture Control 129 Time lapse photography 168 Manage Picture Control 134 Movie settings 65 Auto distortion control 217 Note Depending on camera settings some items may be grayed out and unavailable For information on the options available in each shooting mode see page 309 Reset Shooting Menu MENU button gt shooting menu Select Yes to restore shooting menu options to their default Reset shooting menu values 312 amp 214 Storage Folder MENU button gt shooting menu Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored EE Selecting Folders by Folder Number 1 Choose Select folder by number Storage folder Select folder by number Highlight Select folder by number and press P The dialog shown at right will be displayed 00 100 999 lt Move Set GOK 2 Choose a folder number Press lt or P to highlight a digit press A or VW to change If a folder with the selected number already exists a OG or El icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e 4 Folder is
85. of exposures actually recorded gain for m each exposure is set to 2 for 2 exposures 1 3 for 3 exposures etc e Off Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark Frame a photograph focus and shoot In continuous high speed and continuous low speed release modes M 83 the camera records all exposures in a single burst If On series is selected the camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the shutter release button is pressed if On single photo is selected multiple exposure shooting will end after the first photograph In self timer mode the camera will automatically record the number of exposures selected in Step 3 on page 161 regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots M 227 the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Interval between shots In other release modes one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 163 The icon will flash until shooting ends If On series is selected multiple exposure shooting will only end when Off is selected for multiple exposure mode if On single photo is selected multiple exposure shooting ends automatically when the multiple exposure i
86. of the cover gently outwards as shown at right 17 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options can be accessed from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button MENU button Tabs Choose from the following menus e gt Playback 2 207 oY Setup 249 e O Shooting C1 214 c Retouch Q 261 e Custom Settings M 219 e 13 8 My Menu or Recent settings defaults to My Menu M 280 G SETUP MENU O Slider shows position in current menu WP E e EE Current settings are shown by icons __Iilmage Dust Off ref photo HDMI oO Format memory card 7 Save user settings Sa Reset user settings Monitor brightness z Clean image sensor Menu options Options in current menu Ifa icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the P Multiple exposure monitor help can be displayed by pressing the Pon WB fat Record the specified number of shots as a single image The standby timer is button A description of the currently selected option or extended by 30 s Ifthe timer expires shooting will end and a multiple menu will be displayed while the button is pressed Press i exposure will be created from any g shots that have been taken A or to scroll through the display Yon WB button 18 Using Camera Menus The multi selector and button are used to navigate the camera menus Move cursor up GX button selec
87. progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot the E segment when the first shot is taken the segment when the second shot is taken and the segment when the third shot if applicable is taken To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator and mema icon are no longer displayed ADL Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In self timer mode the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 158 each time the shutter release button is pressed regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots Q 227 the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Interval between shots In other modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume
88. release button is pressed Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed halfway AF S AF F To choose an autofocus mode press the AF mode button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor u Fam AF mode button Main command Monitor dial V Using Autofocus in Live View Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters Note that in live view autofocus is slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame The subject lacks contrast The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent mercury vapor sodium vapor or similar lighting A cross star filter or other special filter is used The subject appears smaller than the focus point The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper The subject is moving 51 52 EE Choosing an AF Area Mode The following AF area modes can be selected in live view Mode E WIDE IN NORM Description
89. s Auto FP 1 200 s Auto FP 1 200 s se Optional Optional Shutter speed Built in flash Built in flash Built in flash flash unit 1 TO eee Auto FP Auto FP not including 250s From 250 to but 200 30 s Flash sync Flash range drops as shutter speed increases Flash range will nevertheless be greater than that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP e2 Flash Shutter Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Flash sync speed This option determines the slowest shutter speed available Flash shutter speed when using front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction in gt I 180s hee 1 15 s mode P or A regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in S and M modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s to 30 s 30s 235 236 e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the flash mode for the built in flash Option Description Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting TTL TTL os conditions Choose the flash level M 236 The camera does not emit monitor pre Mz Manual flashes The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a strobe RPT Repeating flash light effect 236 Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling remote optional flash CMDS Commander mode units in one or mor
90. saved directly to the memory card NEF RAW Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after shooting JPEG fine Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine quality JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one fine quality JPEG fine JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one normal JPEG normal JPEG quality JPEG image lt NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one basic quality JPEG basic JPEG image Size priority selected for JPEG compression Image quality can be set by pressing the amp QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel Q QUAL button Main command dial Control panel The Shooting Menu Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option SHOOTING MENU in the shooting menu 214 on File naming DSC Role played by card in Slot2 OO Image quality NORM Image size Image area si JPEG compression 93 94 The following options can be accessed from the shooting menu Press the MENU button to display the menus highlight the desired option and press gt EE JPEG Compression Choose the type of compression for
91. the AF mode button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the viewfinder or control panel dial Pa er a oe n OL a O auo RFs Ruta AF A AF S Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed ke AF C below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases focus manually M 103 or use focus lock M 102 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph 7 between the subject and the background Example Subject is the same color as the background The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera VN Crs Naa AODAN T Example Subject is inside a Dy cage The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example Subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example A building is in the frame behind the subject The subject contains many The subject is dominated by 7K regular geometric patterns a Ta Example Blind
92. the flash In P S A M and f modes the flash can be raised by pressing the button Ina 4 amp D x and modes the flash will pop up automatically when required 3 Focus Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter release button halfway to focus 4 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to O determine the appropriate flash level Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock Fn button icons m will appear in the viewfinder KARE 149 150 5 Recompose the photograph 6 Take the photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icon mm is no longer displayed in the viewfinder Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash FV lock is only available with the built in flash when TTL is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash T 236 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock is also available with optional flash units in TTL and where supported monitor pre flash AA and monitor pre flash A flash control modes Note that when commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash
93. the following settings to the memory card in Slot 1 CO 96 if the card is full an error will be displayed Use this option to share settings among D600 cameras Menu Custom settings Menu Option Playback display options Image review After delete Rotate tall File naming Role played by card in Slot 2 Image quality Image size Image area JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 1 d 4 Set Picture Control Auto distortion control Color space Active D Lighting Vignette control Long exposure NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Remote control mode Movie settings Playback Setup Shooting Recent Option All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings Clean image sensor HDMI Flicker reduction Time zone and date excepting date and time Language Image comment Auto image rotation Copyright information GPS Non CPU lens data Eye Fi upload My Menu All My Menu items All recent settings Settings Choose tab Settings saved using this model of camera can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in the camera and that the Load settings option is only available if the card contains saved settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUPA The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed 257 Virtual Horizon MENU button
94. the sub command dial to choose a bracketing increment an Bracketing a a increment BKT button Sub command dial Control panel See Also For information on choosing the size of the increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl N 224 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e7 Bracketing order 241 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation M 112 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot the E segment when the unmodified shot is taken the 4 segment when the shot with the negative increment is taken and the P segment when the shot with the positive increment is taken Exposure modified by Exposure modified by Exposure modified by 0 EV M 1 EV 49 1 EV To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator and Mi icon are no longer displayed 154 Exposure and Flash Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes shooting will pause after the num
95. through the lens as shown at right If the device supports HDMI CEC select Off for the HDMI gt Device control option in the setup menu M 205 before shooting in live view Movie Live View Movies can be recorded in live view 2 Press the button The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor as it would appear in the actual movie modified for the effects of exposure The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder button The Icon A icon 61 indicates that movies can not be recorded Before Recording Before recording choose an aperture modes A and M only Q 77 78 you can also choose a Picture Control modes P S A and M only 129 or color space M 217 In modes P S A and M white balance M 115 can be set at any time by pressing the Yon WB button and rotating the main command dial 3 Choose a focus mode M 51 Hunn E HH y gt CESS 8 0 i5 F56 4 Choose an AF area mode M 52 Ou lt WG LOS CRED 2 5S r56 200 57 58 5 Focus Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 3 and 4 on pages 49 for more information on focusing in movie live view see page 51 Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in face priority AF drops in movie live view Exposure The following settings can be adjusted in movie live view In mode M ISO sensitivity can be set to values betwe
96. to the subject changes abruptly the camera waits for the specified period before adjusting the distance to the subject This prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects AF 2 passing through the frame AFz 1 Short AF 3 Normal The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance to the subject Off changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession a4 AF Point Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder Option Description The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish contrast with the background The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of the brightness of On the background Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see The selected focus point is not highlighted The area outside the current crop is shown in grey M 90 a5 Focus Point Wrap Around MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Auto Off Option Description Focus point selection wraps around from top to ooo bottom bottom to top right to left and left to right ao 30 so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is highlighted
97. 0 Indices can be used when viewing and editing movies Press the button to display information on shutter speed aperture and other photo settings in place of movie recording information Press again to return to the movie recording display M 59 Focus and exposure lock while the button is pressed Exposure locks while the button is pressed Exposure locks when the button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires Focus locks while the button is pressed Pressing the button initiates autofocus The shutter release button can not be used to focus Pressing the button has no effect 247 g2 Assign Preview Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button during movie live view The options available are the same as for Assign Fn button M 247 except that the default setting is Index marking g3 Assign AE L AF L Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the aft AE L AF L button during movie live view The options available are the same as for Assign Fn button M 247 except that the default setting is AE AF lock g4 Assign Shutter Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by pressing the shutter release button when is selected with the live view selector Option Description Press the shutter release button all the way down to end movie rec
98. 0 Exposure Compensators inna a EAN 112 White Balance 115 Fine Tuning White Balance sss sssssssissssrescossrosasnnosasnsssssntsusasnosasanieninsanidsanairsnaseisnnbasdnsatonisn 117 Choosing a Color Temperature ssessesssesssessesssesseeseesseeseessceseesseossessesssesseeseesseoseeneeoseesseos 120 PSOE MIT a E E ENEE A 121 Image Enhancement 129 Pic EMS C ONON seco e a E EE E 129 Selecting a Picture Control eseesssessseesesesssseesseesssessseessseesseeoseessseeosseesseeossessssrosseeessersseess 129 Modifying Picture Controls ccsssssesssssssscsssscsssecsssscsecsssecssssssesassecassncsecsssecaseesseessseesees 131 Creating Custom Picture Controls e sssessseesssessseessseesseesssessseeosseeosseesseessseosserossersseesss 134 Sharing Custom Picture Controls ssseesseesssessseessseesseessseessseesserosseosserosseesseeossesoserosseee 136 Preserving Detail in Highlights and ShadOWsS ssesseessesseessesseeseesseeseesseossessesssessess 137 PC TIN D EAU srera a E Mates 137 High Dynamic Range HDR sssesesessssessseesssessseessseesseesssessseeosseesseesnseossseosseesseessseessseessee 139 Flash Photography 143 OE ave Bt atom 61 a Lae al E E A A E E T O A me tort enr Trt 143 FAS FN VOM cayresccselecsteccatussasnsssieascsnvsticiserscautsnci val vevsuicucsutieuserarrorecssaueteeriaiay wuacieat ees achieves 144 Flash Compensation S 148 PV EO K a eses aca ceca edian casein vdinap cana eta res acactia inevsasa ta ted
99. 080 or more better Core 2 Duo e H 264 movies editing 2 6 GHz or better Core 2 Duo e GPU that supports QuickTime H 264 hardware acceleration recommended Pre installed versions of Windows 7 Home Basic Home Premium Professional Enterprise Ultimate Service Pack 1 Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate Service Pack 2 or 32 bit editions of Windows XP Home Edition Professional Service Pack 3 All installed programs may run as 32 bit applications in 64 bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows Vista This application is not compatible with computers running 64 bit Windows XP Windows 7 Windows Vista 1 GB or more 2 GB or more recommended Windows XP 512 MB or more 2 GB or more recommended A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk 1 GB or more recommended Resolution 1024x768 pixels XGA or more 1280 x 1024 pixels SXGA or Mac OS X version 10 5 8 10 6 8 or 10 7 2 512 MB or more 2 GB or more recommended Resolution 1024x768 pixels XGA or more 1280 x 1024 pixels SXGA or more recommended Color 24 bit color millions of colors or more more recommended Color 24 bit color True Color or more EE Supported Standards DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File Systems DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard t
100. 1 968 x 1 112 FS File format e NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed or compressed e JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome Portrait Landscape selected Picture Control can be modified storage for custom Picture Controls Media SD Secure Digital and UHS I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards Double slot Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage of copies created using NEF JPEG pictures can be copied between cards File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras 2 3 PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage e FX 36x24 Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical e DX 24x16 Approx 97 horizontal and 97 vertical Magnification Approx 0 7 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 21 mm 1 0 m7 from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens Viewfinder Diopter adjustment Focusing screen Reflex mirror Depth of field preview Lens aperture Lens Compatible lenses Shutter Type Speed Flash sync speed Release Release mode Frame a
101. 14 bit 234MB 15 16 57 PEG ine 0 0 100 JPEG normal 100 100 100 JPEG basic 100 100 Includes images taken with non DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop 335 EE DX 24x16 Image Area Image quality Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless NEF RAW Lossless NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit 97MB 86 NEF RAW Compressed 14 bit 117MB 61 100 JPEG fine 100 100 100 JPEG normal 3 1 9MB 3300 100 100 Large 100 JPEG basic 100 100 Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop 1 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100 Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression M 94 ISO sensitivity is set to Hi 0 3 or higher or long exposure noise reduction or auto distortion control is on 3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d6 Max Continuous Release M 230 4 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 336 Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies wit
102. 15 battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately EE Supplied Software ViewNxX 2 includes a Nikon Transfer 2 function for copying pictures from the camera to the computer where ViewNX 2 can be used to view and print selected images or to edit photographs and movies For more information see ViewNX 2 online help EE Supported Operating Systems The supplied software can be used with computers running the following operating systems e Windows Pre installed versions of Windows 7 Home Basic Home Premium Professional Enterprise Ultimate Service Pack 1 Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate Service Pack 2 or 32 bit editions of Windows XP Home Edition Professional Service Pack 3 All installed programs may run as 32 bit applications in 64 bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows Vista This application is not compatible with computers running 64 bit Windows XP e Macintosh Mac OS X version 10 5 8 10 6 8 or 10 7 2 See the websites listed on page xxiii for the latest information on supported operating systems Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Close the camera connector cover when the connector is not in use V During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the U
103. 156 ADL bracketing indicator sessecessesseeseeseees 158 Turning the Monitor Off EX ADL bracketing AMOUNE esses 138 EE Multiple exposure indicator cccseeeseeeseee 162 Beep indicator sesssesssessssesssseessssssssesssesssssesseeesee 228 35 Exposure compensation indicator 0 112 EJ Flash compensation indicator ccseseeeeee 148 FV lock indicator seeessesssssssssssessssseesssecssseeessseesssees 149 Interval timer indicator sssssessssseessssssssssseersss 166 A Time lapse indicator eseseseeseseesessesecscseeeees 170 EJ GPS connection indicator ssesssssesesssssesssseees 175 Depth of field preview button assignment 244 Vignette control indicator csessessseseeseeees 218 Active D Lighting indicator 138 High ISO noise reduction indicator 218 Movie Settings ssssscssseesssseessssesssseessseessssesssseesssseen 65 Autofocus MOE ssssssssssesessssssssreesesssssrrresssssserrresss 97 Eye Fi connection indicator cessseessseeeseeessees 260 CYA ISO sensitivity indicator ccsesececeeseeseeeeesees 105 SO SOTAS TEI ICY eean Srna 105 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator csessesseseeees 108 Picture Control INGICATOM ccssseessseessseesseeesseess 130 To clear shooting information from the monitor press the ff button twice more or press the shutter release button halfway The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are
104. 21 313 EE Setup Menu Defaults Option Default Default M Option Default M user settings Flicker reduction 252 Shooting mode Time zone and date meon 5 Monitor s Manual Auto image rotation o Ons OOo o l GPS tandby timer Enable Use GPS to set camera clock Eye Fi upload Enable Clean image sensor Clean at startup shutdown ean at sates 301 shutdown HDMI Output resolution Auto 205 Device control a 314 Exposure Program Mode P The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph ISO 100 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF S NIKKOR 50mm f 1 4G x V 1 1 1 4 f 2 f 2 8 f 4 f 5 6 f 8 f 11 f 16 f 22 f 32 o gt YR ON YD amp OA FD OND WY Aperture 30 15 8 4 2 4 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed seconds The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 16 3 EV are reduced to 161 3 EV 315 316 Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Display Viewfinder is out of focus Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece correction l
105. 36 The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the information display when the i button is pressed wa YOON HF ON 0A Cho dmr 52s Ma 0 Picture Control indicator The Shooting Menu Picture Controls can also be selected using the Set Picture Control EJ SHOOTING MENU option in the shooting menu A 214 a a Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control zi Auto distortion control E Color space sRGB Active D Lighting OFF HDR high dynamic range OFF Modifying Picture Controls Existing preset or custom Picture Controls M 134 can be modified to suit the scene or the user s creative intent Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust or make manual adjustments to individual settings 1 Select a Picture Control Set itr Con Highlight the desired Picture Control in the ENL Neutra Picture Control list 1 129 and press gt cS FMC Monochrome EPT Portrait EALS Landscape Grid GAdjust 2 Adjust settings Press A or W to highlight the desired setting YS M 132 and press lt or P to choose a value a gt Be Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or select Quick adjust to choose a ges preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the T m button 3 Press 6R Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default Set Picture Control settings are indicated by an
106. 4 Exposure Comp for FlaSh s eseesssessseessseesseessseresseesseesneesssecesseesseessserosscesseesseeesss 240 e5 Moqdeling Flash eeina E i E EE A REES 241 e0 AUtO Bracketing Set waste E A A A 241 e7 Bracketing Order ooreei nena a esterases 241 xvi PEONO aeo a E N 241 f1 OK Button Shooting Mode sesseessseeessseessssessssecssssersnsseessseeosseesosseeossseeossseessse 241 P ASSION FM BUTUO Marian N ete 242 F3 ASSIGN Preview BUTTON Seeerei A AA 244 f4 Assign AE L AF L Button esssseesssssesessssecoossseersssseeeossecoossenersssseerossssecessseeresssseeees 244 5 CUSTOMIZE Command Dials ccesssssssessssscsssscsecsssecssscsessssecsssecsesscssesssecseessseenees 245 f6 Release Button tO USe Dial esesssssssssssssssecsssecsssscsessssecsessssecsssecssescseesssecaeesees 246 17s SIOU ERA TY Release LOCK aerus a aea maatartanarniess 246 TB Reverse IACI CATON nnns aeea A ON 246 f9 Assign MB D14 Button sssssesesssseessssseerssssceeosssserosssseresssseeoosssereossseceosssserossseeeess 247 MOVIE eaaa a e E AE E aA Perr en tere 247 OAS ASSIGN Fa BUTO a a tine eee veseencteede 247 G2 ASSIGN Preview BUTTON iiciccscrercxtticiccst cccsnsiiaicncenta ieieat een a 248 G3 ASSIGN AEs ZAR sky BUOM nrocos 248 G4ZASSION shutter BUTTON renen N AAR 248 1 The Setup Menu Camera Setup cccsessecsesssssssssssessssssessssscsscssessessessssssssessessssncsscescenceseeseenes 249 Format Memory Card purane aa E eaavorsunenurainco
107. 46 f6 Release Button to Use Dial MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding the 4 E24 Q7 ISO QUAL 2 on WB AF mode 5 sm or BKT button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released this also applies to the Fn and depth of field preview buttons if they have been assigned Active D Lighting using Custom Setting f2 Assign Fn button or Custom Setting f3 Assign preview button Setting ends when any of the affected buttons is pressed again or the shutter release button is pressed halfway Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer setting will also end when the standby timer expires f7 Slot Empty Release Lock MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera f8 Reverse Indicators MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If et inisqisinieet 9 is selected the exposure indicators in the control panel viewfinder and information display are displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right Select het iniinites 07 to display positive values on the l
108. Aperture f number s sssssessssessssessssesssseersss 77 78 k Aperture number of stops sceceeseees 73 288 EJ Flash compensation indicator cccccceceeees 148 10 Exposure compensation indicator 112 KIJ ISO sensitivity indicator essen 105 ESOS IS IN CY sin 105 Active D Lighting aMOunt s sssssessssssessssseees 138 AF area mode ssssssssssseeesssssesssseeesssssesssseresssseesssss 99 KE Flash ready indicator sssesssssssessesessee 39 231 No Battery 1 0 4 boo Mood Tr eS FV lock indicator seessesessssesssseesssseesssecsssseessseesssees 149 KE Flash sync indicator 234 16 Aperture Stop INdicator ccescsesseseeseees 73 288 UV Exposure indicator e essssseessseessseessseessseesssecesseee 78 Exposure compensation display csse 112 RollindicatO nsen 243 KEJ Low battery warning sssssssssssssssssseeesnsssessesen 35 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 153 WB bracketing indicator csecsessesseeeseeseeees 156 ADL bracketing indicator cssscsesessseseeeeees 158 EQ Auto ISO sensitivity indicator sss 108 Number of exposures remMaining sseseeee 36 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills sacesssstsbsevessnterreariontinvncoenstvon 38 84 335 Preset white balance recording indicator 122 Exposure compensation value sss ssss0000000 112 Flash compensation VAIUC cscesceceesessee
109. B D14 multi power battery pack with one rechargeable Nikon EN EL15 Li ion battery or six AA alkaline Ni MH or lithium batteries AC adapter EH 5b AC adapter requires EP 5B power connector available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions W x H x D Approx 141 x 113 x 82 mm 5 6 x 4 4 x 3 2 in Weight Approx 850 g 1 Ib 14 0 oz with battery and memory card but without body cap approx 760 g 1 Ib 10 8 oz camera body only Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity 85 or less no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain 330 MH 25 battery charger Rated input in North America des algae ae a AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 23 0 12 A in other regions Rated output DC 8 4 V 1 2 A Supported batteries Nikon EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion batteries Charging time Approx 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F when no charge remains Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 91 5 x 33 5 x 71 mm 3 6 x 1 3 x 2 8 in excluding projections
110. C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance Capacity may be reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0 C 32 F to 15 C 59 F and from 45 C 1 13 F to 60 C 140 F If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly about eight times a second during charging confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery If the problem persists cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative Do not short the charger terminals failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info M 255 display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are
111. CAtOM esssssssssssssssssssessssstesssssees 261 F Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image M 181 6 age quality ecis 93 moge iE nana 95 iy iage area acca ctecitaace tice ramets 89 BE File NAM Os tacecasrstnaninianeniorentenends 216 KY Time of recording sexs cecrtesieseandurateents 27 253 Folder NaM GC ccsssessssesscsssessssecsssecessesscsssscseseees 215 BEY Date of recording ssssssessessesssssserssessesseese 27 253 KEJ Current card slot sssssssessessessessresssssssseaseane 46 178 Metering sssssssssssssessossrsesesrtressororesseseressororesesrses 109 BE Shooting mode ssssssssessessessssssssssssssess 35 40 73 16 Shutter speed wvceccccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssees 74 PCPS sscctdssccesseeexsivsastceassteotercicterentetieaeiasnt 74 18 ISO sensitivity 7 scsscssssicsssvesssnassessvscesssestassessnsine 105 KEJ Focal length sssssssssssesssssesresresresease 172 288 291 20 GPS data indicator cceucsssessssssssssesesssesssseessees 175 21 Image comment indicator ssssssssesessseseeess 253 22 Active D Lighting sssss ssssssessssssrssssrsrsssssrressss 137 23 Picture Contr l sisisi 129 le 6 ih 0 ee ee Nn re 217 Flash MOE sruni 144 White balance sssesseessessseessesssesssossecsseesseessee 115 Color temperature ssesssesssesssessessseesserssess 120 White balance fine tuning sss sssse s 117 Preset Manual s ssesseesseessessseessesseesssesseesseess 121
112. CIV ICY soiien 105 Auto ISO sensitivity CONtIOL essesseeseeees 107 Two button FeSECL sssescescccscssececceccnccscessenes 151 EJ Diopter adjustment control ssssssssussssseeeense 33 art Dutton H Using the AE AF lock button 102 110 244 KE Main command dial csssssssssesssnsseessssssee 12 245 Multi selector c ssssscssssessssseccssssecessssccessseccssseesesseecs 19 BEY 69 OK button nc cccsssssssseesnssseeseeessnsee 19 241 pJ Focus selector lock essssssssssessnssssssseessnssseseesn 101 Memory card slot COVED ssssssssssessssssecsesseseessees 29 Ambient brightness sensor for automatic f monitor brightness control s0 53 250 Live view selector Live view photography s essssssssssserssssessssseee 49 Movie live view cssessecsesssscsecsesessecsecsecseesseeees 57 20 TEV UTE ON sasssezssciacavesinvtpnizeemineshavionneenesienae 49 57 BAN Infrared receiver rear ssssssssssssssesssssssssesesense 86 22 Memory card access laMP ccsessessssesseeseeees 29 38 ER SOC E E 67 M info 0101 0 ee 9 11 The Mode Dial The camera offers the modes Mode dial listed below To choose a mode press the mode dial lock release and rotate the mode dial Mode dial lock release P S A and M Modes Select these modes for full control over camera settings e P Programmed auto CL 75 e S Shutter priority auto N 76 e A Aperture priority auto A 77 e M Manu
113. Description Choose a Q5 ISO Press Q amp ISO to choose orientation of area that is in focus orientation If area of effect is in wide orientation press A or W to position frame showing area of copy that will be in focus Choose position If area of effect is in tall orientation press lt or gt to position frame showing area of copy that will be in focus ss Cancel G 8Confirm W9Save If area of effect is in wide orientation press lt or gt to choose height Choose size If area of effect is in tall orientation press A or W to choose width Preview copy Preview copy Cancel Exit to full frame playback without creating copy reate copy reate copy C T C Selective Color MENU button gt r retouch menu Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color 1 Select Selective color RETOUCH MENU Miniature effect Selective color Edit movie Highlight Selective color in the retouch menu and press gt to display a picture selection dialog me NB 2 Selecta photograph Selective color Highlight a photograph to view the c 100ND600 t highlighted photograph full frame press is E EA and hold the amp QUAL button to view g ES Tes y images in other locations as described on RE page 178 hold BKT and press A Press 68 to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step 3 Select a color Selected color Use the multi selector to position the cu
114. Dit err ra eee errr 94 14 bit acetate ee een 94 2 016 pixel RGB sensor 146 327 3D tracking ou essscssecsesesseeseens 99 100 A AC ACGAPTED 5 e scssecssceasessoeees 297 299 Accessories scsssssssssssssrsssssssesesars 297 ACCESSOLY SHOC sssssecssesssecsseseseens 292 Accessory terminal ecsecseeeeee 298 Active D Lighting 137 158 Add items My Menu 000 280 ADL bracketing csee 158 241 Adobe RGB sisscsccsssceesateresseieesacorentes 217 AE amp flash Auto bracketing set 153 241 AE NOC cseeviciaserdaclntieuteansendens 110 AE only Auto bracketing set 153 241 AE L AF L button 102 110 244 248 AFren inini 51 52 97 102 AF area brackets eeseseseeeeee 8 33 AF fine tune woe eeeecesesceseseseseseeeeeees 259 AF point illumination 222 AF A iaa 97 AF area MOde esssseseesseeseceseese 52 99 AF ASSIST cccscecsesereres 223 290 296 AEG ainda 97 221 AF F ccchissiatiictiensitissdanaaeineian 51 AF mode button 51 52 98 100 Soo eer ee eee 51 97 221 After GEOG is sassscsesscavstcavninsotieneaens 212 A M mode SWITCH u ee eeeesesseeeeeeeee 26 Ambient brightness sensor 4 53 250 Angle Of ViQW ccsesssssecsssssscsseseeees 291 Aperture os scsssossesinaisscsevaieres 74 77 78 Aperture priority auto 77 Aspect ratio ss sesssessessessesesssessesees 265 Assign AE L AF L button 244 248 Assign Fn bu
115. F ED am UU EASA 28 35 mm No vignetting 24mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF Zoom Nikkor 20 35mm f 2 8D IF 28 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 35mm No vignetting 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 35 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in 50 70 mm No vignetting 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 35 120 mm No vignetting 24mm 2 0 m 6 ft 7 in AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED VR 28 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 50 120 mm No vignetting AF S Zoom Nikkor 28 70mm f 2 8D IF ED Lomami KO oi 50 70 mm No vignetting 28 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S NIKKOR 28 300mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR 35mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 50 300 mm No vignetting PC E NIKKOR 24mm f 3 5D ED 24mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in When not shifted or tilted AF S NIKKOR 24mm f 1 4G ED AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED 7 lt AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges The built in flash can also be used with Al S Al Al modified NIKKOR Nikon Series E and non CPU lenses with a focal length of 24 300mm Al 50 300mm f 4 5 modified Al 50 300mm f 4 5 Al S 50 300mm f 4 5 ED and Al 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 70 mm or above With AI S and Al 25 50mm f 4 ED lenses the ranges above which vignetting will not occur are 2 0 m 6 ft 7 in ata zoom position of 25 mm and 1 0m 3 ft 3 in ata zoom position of 28 mm vignetting will not occur at zoom positions of 35 mm or above 289 290 AF Assist Illumination
116. F4 VR NO Choose the AF tuning value used when no Default eae sila value exists for the current lens Nave focal Bevo CPU lenses only point toward value camera List previously saved AF tuning values To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press m To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used with only one lens of each type highlight the List saved desired lens and press gt values The menu shownat right will be displayed press Aor W MEET Choose lens number to choose an identifier and press to save changes and oA 1 00n exit F4 VR NO no AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied m Live View Tuning is not applied to autofocus during in live view M 53 Saved Value Only one value can be stored for each type of lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter 259 Eye Fi Upload MENU button gt setup menu This option is displayed only when an Eye Fi memory card available separately from third party suppliers is inserted in the camera Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected destination Note that pictures will not be uploaded if
117. Face priority AF Use for portraits The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects the selected subject is indicated by a double yellow border if multiple faces up to a maximum of 35 are detected the camera will focus on the closest subject to choose a different subject use the multi selector If the camera can no longer detect the subject because for example the subject has turned to face away from the camera the border will no longer be displayed Wide area AF Use for hand held shots of landscapes and other non portrait subjects Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame or press to position the focus point in the center of the frame Normal area AF Use for pin point focus on a selected spot in the frame Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame or press to position the focus point in the center of the frame A tripod is recommended Subject tracking AF Position the focus point over your subject and press 6 The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame To end tracking press K again Note that the camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly leave the frame or are obscured by other objects change visibly in size color or brightness or are too small too large too bright too dark or similar in color or brightness to the background To choose an AF area mode press the AF mode button and rotate the
118. G fine JPEG normal or JPEG basic RAW will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF RAW copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed to record NEF RAW copies with a series of photographs keep the shutter release button pressed halfway between shots To exit without recording an NEF RAW copy press the Fn button again Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed Option Description Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to turn the framing EE Framing grid grid display in the viewfinder on or off M 8 Choose Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to choose an image area imagearea C189 Viewfinder virtual Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder horizon MY MENU Pressing the Fn button displays MY MENU 280 p sina Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in MY MENU Select this MENU option for quick access to a frequently used menu item If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated changes NO 1stepspd to shutter speed modes and M and aperture modes A and M are made 7 aperture in increments of 1 EV regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl N 224 Non CPU ie Press the Fn button and rotate a command
119. HER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L L C SEE http www mpegla com Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY M Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized
120. I choose the focus point 101 Q Exposure Can I make photos brighter or darker 112 How do preserve details in shadows and highlights 137 Q Using the Flash Can I set the flash to fire automatically when needed How do keep the flash from firing 35 143 147 How do avoid red eye Q Image Quality and Size How do take pictures for printing at large sizes 293 95 How can I get more pictures on the memory card Viewing Photographs RA Q Playback How do I view photographs on the camera 46 177 How do I view more information about a photo 179 184 Can I view photos in an automatic slide show 213 Can I view photos on a TV 204 205 Can I protect photos from accidental deletion 188 Deletion How do I delete unwanted photos 47 189 191 Retouching Photographs o Connections How do I create retouched copies of photos How do I remove red eye How do I make JPEG copies of RAW NEF photos Can I overlay two NEF RAW photos to make a single image Can I create a copy of a photo that looks like a painting Can I trim movie footage on the camera or save movie stills enus and Settings How do I use the menus How do I display menus in another language How do I use the command dials How do I keep the displays from turning off How do focus the viewfinder Can I display a framing grid in the viewfinder or the monitor How do tell if the camera is level How do I set the camera clock Ho
121. LR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected The flash control mode for the built in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash N 236 The information display shows the flash control mode for the built in flash as follows Flash sync Auto FP A 234 i TTL TTL Manual Repeating flash Commander mode 146 Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range Flash range varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range i00 200 400 soo 1600 3200 60 m S 42 28 4 56 8 n 07 85 Dftain 27fe in 2 28 4 56 8 1 16 06 60 aft T9ft Bin 28 4 56 8 16 22 0642 2ft 13 e9in 4 6 3 2 ft 9ft 10in 5 6 06 21 2ft 6ft 1Tin 8 6 1 2ft 4ft 11in 11 ee 2ft 3ft 7in 1 2 32 0608 ezh The built in flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft In mode P the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of wo x0 wo so woo 3200 e If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum
122. Length of power cable Approx 1 8 m 6 ft U S A and Canada or 1 5 m 4 9 ft other countries Weight Approx 110 g 3 9 oz excluding power cable and AC wall adapter EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 0 V 1 900 mAh Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 40 x 56 x 20 5 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 88 g 3 1 oz excluding terminal cover Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain 331 332 ViewNX 2 Hard disk space Windows Mac 0S Photographs JPEG movies Intel e Photographs JPEG movies PowerPC Celeron Pentium 4 or Core series G4 1 GHz or better G5 Intel 1 6 GHz or better Core series or Xeon series H 264 movies playback 3 0 GHz or e H 264 movies playback PowerPC better Pentium D Intel Core i5 or G5 Dual or Core Duo 2 GHz or better recommended when better Intel Core i5 or better viewing movies with a frame size recommended when viewing of 1 280 x 720 or more at a frame movies with a frame size of rate of 30 fps or above or movies 1 280 x 720 or more at a frame with a frame size of 1 920 x 1 080 rate of 30 fps or above or or more movies with a frame size of H 264 movies editing 2 6 GHz or 1 920 x 1
123. NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay EL a Ignting Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu Redeye correction rim al ial CAN Ee Color balance Image overlay mh NEF RAW processing The dialog shown at right will be displayed with Image overlay Image 1 highlighted press to display a list of Image1 Image2__Preview the NEF pictures created with this camera 7 i a1 0 P41 0 2 Select the first image inne overia Use the multi selector to highlight the first ci 100ND600 fH photograph in the overlay To view the 5 ay ki uy eas ey highlighted photograph full frame press and 4 gt a gt hold the amp QUAL button to view images in by4 wot La other locations as described on page 178 hold BKT and press A Press 8 to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display 3 Select the second image The selected image will appear as Image 1 Highlight Image 2 and press then select the second photo as described in Step 2 269 270 4 Adjust gain Image overlay Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize Image 1 Image2 Preview exposure for the overlay by pressing A or F to i id select gain from values between 0 1 and 2 0 z m m5 Repeat for the second image The default value is Saran aie 1 0 select 0 5 to halve gain or 2 0 to double it The effects are visible in the Preview column tad Save 5 Preview the overlay nase ove Press lt or P to place th
124. NU M 214 Reset shooting Yes menu No Storage folder Select folder by number Select folder from list File naming File naming Role played by Overflow default card in Slot 2 Backup RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 Image quality NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal NEF RAW JPEG basic QUAL ny Qa QO 93 NEF RAW JPEG fine JPEG normal default JPEG basic Image size Large default Sig Sua Medium PEEN 95 Small Image area Auto DX crop Choose image area JPEG Size priority default compression Optimal quality NEF RAW Type recording NEF RAW bit depth White balance 6p Auto default Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight Flash Cloudy Shade Choose color temp D o 1 115 Preset manual Items marked with a SD icon can be saved to the memory card using the Save load settings gt Save settings option in the camera setup menu M 249 The saved settings can be copied to other D600 cameras by inserting the memory card into the camera and selecting Save load settings gt Load settings Set Picture Standard default Control Neutral Vivid Monochrome Portrait Landscape Manage Picture Save edit Control Rename Delete Load save Auto distortion On control Off default Color space sRGB default Adobe RGB Active Auto D Lighting Extra high High Normal Low Off HDR high HDR mode dynamic range Exposure differential Smoothing Vignette control High Normal
125. NU button to display the menus Highlight HDR high dynamic range in the shooting menu and press gt DMO MENU button n SHOOTING MENU NEF RAW recording White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control m Auto distortion control E Color space sRGB Active D Lighting OFF 139 140 2 Select a mode HDR high dynamic range Highlight HDR mode and press P HDR mode OFF gt Exposure differential AUTO Smoothing NORM Highlight one of the following and press 68 HDR hish dynamic range s HDR mode e To take a series of HDR photographs select a ONS On series HDR shooting will ean continue until you select Off for HDR a mode e To take one HDR photograph select On single photo Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have created a single HDR photograph e To exit without creating additional HDR photographs select Off If On series or On single photo is selected a W icon will be displayed in the control panel 3 Choose the exposure differential HDR high dynamic range To choose the difference in exposure between the two shots highlight Exposure differential and press gt Smoothing NORM The options shown at right will be POR naaa rira z Exposure differentia displayed Highlight an option and press 6 o Choose higher values for high contrast subjects but note that choosing a value 2EV higher than required may not prod
126. O BT i ASC mn ali me al 46 UE A p lt tat See g amp Ay UTE A OK 4 a A APRE peaa i 1 Color temperature indicator ceseseeseseeseees 120 Shutter speed sse ssssesessessssessssecssssesssscessserssse 76 78 Exposure compensation value ccseeeeee 112 Flash compensation ValUC cccsecesseeeeeeeee 148 White balance fine tuning ssssssssssssessssscessss 118 Color t MPerature csecsecesseseseseseeees 115 120 White balance preset NUMbET ccccceseceeees 121 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing SEQUENCE ssseesssssssssssseessssseesssss 153 Number of shots in WB bracketing SCOUET CO pecure aaa 156 Number of intervals for interval timer photography esson 165 Focal length non CPU lenses cscssesseeeees 172 17 23 aco 24 19 T fal fs DRI a a mmm r njia 25 MA E 26 20 HORII mo Bett 4 27 21 ee a 22 a_i 28 MOTE TING sacistascssanssicasstsscetoreaosatinatincsinenaiasieiis 109 KEJ Flash sync indicator scssssssseessssssseesenssessee 234 BE Flexible program indicator ssesssssesssssseesse 75 Auto area AF indicator essesscsssssssssscsesseeneess 99 AF area mode indicator c essessesesscseeseeseeees 100 3D tracking INGICATOM essesscsecsssesscescsseseeneees 99 21 HOR Indica OF ssscsnsinsnansiesmsncesnnane 140 FJJ Multiple exposure indicator csesssseseesessnsee 161 JEJ MB D14 battery
127. RE Ay WTI MSY emess E A ES eens 8 The Information Display sesseesssseesssseesssesssseesssseesssseessseeonseeeosseesssseeosseresseerosseeossserssssersssee 9 The C mmand Dials cae czcczcasccascn cvavasasessnstezstestacesne inc ioersicianessetvsocnenseunareensoenstaionntetaanearcinys 12 The BM 14 Monitor COVED casscsscesncsssacesdossacassensccsbenshnseuetiscdsinessacesSoredstacsaroiuctedecitesstvsbentertense 17 E ECR SALU scree E O EA A E L A E I TA AE A A 18 Using Camera MenUsS sscscscscscssssssessssssssssesscssssasarasasassesesesesseseacacacasasassssesesesesesesearanas 19 FS E E o PEN E E E E E E A A O 21 Charge the Batory eeann tcrnver tt eter anarnn nti eee ener See 21 Hren Batey ouen an E ives ANE i penta 23 Aa EO a a avandia ra sgimmtenoenseosaaes ayae e 25 PS NS crassa aesc ets vap crs E E OEO EEE EAE 27 LYS SUR a Memory Calderes ET O 29 Format the Memory Card s sesessssessseesseesssessssersseeoseeosseeosseesseeoseerosseosserossersseeossesossrossersseess 31 AGJUSE Viewinder FOCUS sis csssssssascasacascivsacavicedanscvsevenonssnsseousen sobenvessnsvnotesnsonseedsecvebdebendedseosees 33 Basic Photography and Playback 35 Point and Shoot Photography 1 and MOdeS c scssssssessessesseessessesssssseeseeseerees 35 Step 1 Turn the Camera ON cssessssssssssssssssscscsssscscscssssescscsesessesesessesescacsesseseseseseseseeeeees 35 Step 2 Select Gr or D MOE wv ccccscssscssesssesssessesssesssesssessesss
128. SB cable while transfer is in progress Windows To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2 select All Programs gt Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu Internet connection required 193 Connecting the Camera Connect the camera using the supplied UC E15 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 3 Connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown M USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 4 Turn the camera on 5 Start Nikon Transfer 2 If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program select Nikon Transfer 2 Windows 7 If the following dialog is displayed select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below 1 Under Import pictures and videos click Change program A program selection dialog will be displayed select Import file using Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK 2 Double click Import file 194 6 Click Start Transfer At default settings all the pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer for more information on using Nikon Transfer 2 start ViewNX 2 or Nikon Transfer 2 and select ViewNX 2 Help from the Help menu Start Transfer 7 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends Nikon Transfer 2 will close automatically when transfer is complete Camera Control P
129. Selecting self timer remote or MuPp release mode To resume shooting 1 Choose a new starting time Interval timer shootin 5 Choose start time Choose a new starting time as described on page 164 4E Start time 2 Resume shooting Highlight Restart and press 6 Note that if interval timer photography was paused during shooting any shots remaining in the current interval will be canceled 09 30 lt gt Move EE nterrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset M 151 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu M 214 e Changing bracketing settings M 153 e Terminating HDR M 139 or multiple exposure shooting M 163 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends EE No Photograph The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was due to start the photograph or photographs for the previous interval have yet to be taken the memory buffer is full or the camera is unable to focus in AF S or when single servo AF is selected in AF A note that the camera focuses again before each shot Shooting will resume with the next interval 167 Time Lapse Photography The camera automatically take
130. T 4 m Se na 156 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is l_ D wm Z bb greater than the number of exposures remaining a Totes art Fst and the icon for the affected card will flash in 7 VEN the control panel a flashing Fut icon will appear in the viewfinder as shown at right and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator and m icon are no longer displayed White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display Q 117 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis In self timer mode M 85 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released regardless of the option selected for Custom S
131. a Fine tune optimal exposure Shutter release button AE L Standby timer Self timer Monitor off delay Remote on duration 1 2 step 1 3 step 1 2 step On Auto reset On Off od 8mm 612mm 15mm b 20 mm Average Yes No On Off 4s 6s 10s 30s 1 min 5 min 10 min 30 min No limit Self timer delay Number of shots default default default default default default default Interval between shots Playback Menus Information display Image review Live view 1 min 5 min 10 min 15 min default Show ISO sensitivity Show ISO Easy ISO Show frame count d Shooting display d1 Beep Volume Pitch d2 Viewfinder On grid display Off d3 ISO display and adjustment d4 Screentips On Off d5 CLmode 5 fps shooting 4 fps speed 3 fps 2 fps 1 fps d6 Max 1 100 continuous release d7 Filenumber On sequence Off Reset d8 Information Auto display Manual d9 LCD On illumination Off d10 Exposure 3s delay mode 2s 1s Off d11 Flash warning On Off d12 MB D14 d13 Battery order battery type LR6 AA alkaline HR6 AA Ni MH FR6 AA lithium default default default default default default default default default default Use MB D14 batteries first default Use camera battery first e Bracketing flash el e2 e3 e3 e4 e5 e6 e7 Flash sync speed Flash shutter speed Flash
132. aisdineadoreeadbadsaaeniisd enatadis 82 Release Mode 83 Choosing a Release Mode sssssssssssssssssssessscsessssssescscsescssesescscsesessseeseseseseseseeseseseseseeseaess 83 Self Timer and Remote Control Modes cscssssssssesssesessssesesesscsesessessseseesesessesescseeseees 85 MnO UND NONE pera E A A E eta 88 Image Recording Options 89 EE SPN E TEA EN E E A E E T 89 Image Quality and SIZE essssssscsssssesscsssssecscsssesscecsesscsesssescsesesecscaesssessesesecseacsesecseasseeees 93 MaE OUa eraan E N 93 Taare e cis V4 e A E N EE A E E 95 Using TWO Memory CardScan esini ra a EE E AE A as E NEER 96 Focus 97 PIO FOCUS monena g N 97 Autofocus MOE oii ssesssesssvsstccsssateeisvciacechcatbretesinstiasndsibiasr nici asst sunsets ston aasenbantiaheeeiioks 97 PN hI OS ses cossevedec spt pcos ene ea onvn stu ceacentz sastucnstctodacpseadis sta snistetckdnuathdssasersiocetinasdeessianees 99 FOCUS Point SELECTION ssessssicienssscsisuttaiscsescsous veosasscenscatacasebassvancassviveaivsdsonsesteasavinissesselidarseiveds 101 FOS OG IR ana T 102 NANA CUS cist sscsceaventeconesveasen tees tatscvesiteancetes O iN 103 ISO Sensitivity 105 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control 0 scssesesssesecssssecscsssssessesssecsssssesessssecessesesessssesessessseess 107 xii Exposure 109 PCM UI Gy PEE OEE EA EE AEE AAA TA AAA A A T 109 Autoexposure LOCK cesssssssscsssssesssscscsesssessssescsesesesssessesesesesesessssesesescaesesseseseseaeaeseseeeseees 11
133. al Q 78 Auto Modes Select these modes for simple point and shoot photography e G Auto M 35 e Auto flash off VA 35 Scene Modes M 40 The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene Match your selection to the scene being photographed U1 and U2 Modes M 81 Store and recall customized shooting settings Non CPU Lenses Non CPU M 285 lenses can be used only in modes A and M Selecting another mode when a non CPU lens is attached disables the shutter release The Release Mode Dial To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting M 83 Mode Description One photograph is taken each time the shutter en S Single frame release button is pressed Ea l The camera takes photographs at a slow rate S a a CL Continuous low speed while the shutter release button is pressed Be CH Continuous high speed The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while Ta the shutter release button is pressed sy As for single frame except that camera noise is i J Q Quiet shutter release g p ely reduced i ee S Self timer Take pictures with the self timer a I SS Take pictures with an optional ML L3 remote S ve Remote control A p Ot control Bie MUP Mirror up Raise the mirror before taking photographs The Control Panel r men TTT TEN Ee XT a A TAS ETIR z ISO AUT
134. alance Image was not created with D600 C1 124 White balance bracketing unavailable e NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image quality option selected for image quality Q 93 e Multiple exposure mode is in effect M 163 Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image A auto is selected for sharpening contrast or saturation For consistent results over a series of photos choose another setting M 132 Metering can not be changed Autoexposure lock or movie live view is in effect 1 57 110 Exposure compensation can not be used Choose mode P S or A M 75 76 77 Noise reddish areas or other artifacts appears in long time exposures Enable long exposure noise reduction M 218 319 320 Playback NEF RAW image is not played back Photo was taken at image quality of NEF JPEG M 93 Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed correctly Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback Select All for Playback folder CQ 207 Tall portrait orientation photos are displayed in wide landscape orientation e Select On for Rotate tall 1V 212 e Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation M 254 e Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken M 254 e Photo is displayed in image review M 212 Can not delete picture e Picture is protected remove protection M 188 e Memory card
135. amera has run out Insert new memory card 29 of file or folder numbers Release shutter If error persists or appears frequently consult Nikon authorized service D gt a P flashes Camera malfunction representative 323 324 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm No memory card is memory card that card is correctly inserted e Error accessing e Use Nikon approved card memory card e Check that contacts are clean If card is damaged m contact retailer or Nikon This memory card cannot be used Ar l authorized service Card may be Err i representative camagan Wlasne Unable t t Delete fil insert 29 189 inceee angthercard nable to create new elete files or insert new folder memory card after copying important images to computer or other device Check that Eye Fi card 260 firmware is up to date Camera can not control Copy files on Eye Fi card to 29 31 Eye Fi card a computer or other device 193 and format card or insert new card Doos ere flashes g Memory card is locked Slide lock to write position Memory card is locked write protected l i Slide card write protect switch to write position 24 Not available if 2 Eye Fi card is locked j e r Lr rr Eye Fi card is locked ahes write protected This card is not Far Memory card has not E EEA EE E formatted bee
136. an be previewed in the edit display Press 8 to copy a ae the photograph v E Cancel G 3Zo0om OK AY E Red Eye Correction MENU button gt 4 retouch menu This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction can be previewed in the edit display Confirm the effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding To Description Zoomin QUAL Press QUAL to zoom in R ISO to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi Zoomout QS ISO selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll View other vad nee l a Gp rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation areas ofimage 4 window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed area currently Cancel zoom visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Press to cancel Zoom If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph a copy will be created that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye gt Create copy DE 264 Trim MENU button gt
137. and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds e 3D tracking Select the focus point as described on page 101 In AF A and AF C focus modes the camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point and select new focus points as required Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point e Auto areaAF The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point If a type G or D lens is used M 287 the camera can distinguish human subjects from the background for improved subject detection The active focus points are highlighted briefly after the camera focuses in AF C mode or when continuous servo autofocus is selected in AF A mode the main focus point remains highlighted after the other focus points have turned off 99 100 AF area mode can be selected by pressing the AF mode button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the viewfinder or control panel Sub command dial 00 ooo 0000 0000 ia ia 0000 0000 000 Control panel Viewfinder 3D tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Conseque
138. another mode after starting time lapse photography in mode U1 or U2 A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where time lapse photography ended Note that time lapse photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the power source is removed or disconnected or the destination memory card is ejected EE No Photograph The camera will skip the current frame if it is unable to focus using single servo autofocus AF S or single servo autofocus selected for AF A note that the camera focuses again before each shot Shooting will resume with the next frame Image Review The gt button can not be used to view pictures while time lapse photography is in progress but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the playback menu M 212 Other playback operations can not be performed while the frame is displayed See Also For information on setting a beep to sound when time lapse photography is complete see Custom Setting d1 Beep M 228 171 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non CPU lens If the focal length of the lens is known e Power zoom can be used with optional flash units M 294 e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display If the maximum aperture of the lens is known e The ape
139. anotype displays a preview of Increase the selected image press A to increase color saturation saturation W to decrease Press to create a L A gt monochrome copy lt gt K4 y S Decrease Darker Lighter GSave saturation 266 Filter Effects MENU button gt r4 retouch menu Choose from the following filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the Skylight picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Red intensifier Intensify reds Red intensifier greens Green Green intensifier intensifier or blues Blue intensifier Press A to increase the effect V to decrease Blue intensifier Add starburst effects to light sources e Number of points Choose from four six or eight e Filter amount Choose the brightness of the light de sources affected Crossscreen je Filter angle Choose the angle of the points g e Length of points Choose the length of points SA e Confirm Preview the effects of the filter as shown at MEA right Press amp QUAL to preview the copy full frame e Save Create a retouched copy Cancel Z00om OK 0 Add a soft filter effect Press A or W to choose the filter an strength
140. ansmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause LCDs to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and o
141. ard and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in other D600 cameras and software and then deleted when no longer needed To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the Manage Picture Control memory card or to delete custom Picture Controls from the memory card highlight Load save in the seat Manage Picture Control menu and press The rere following options will be displayed e Copy to camera Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to custom Picture Controls C 1 through C 9 on the camera and name them as desired e Delete from card Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the memory card The confirmation GSES dialog shown at right will be displayed before a ma Se Picture Control is deleted to delete the selected Picture Control highlight Yes and press 68 e Copy to card Copy a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 from the camera to a selected destination 1 through 99 on the memory card Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera M 129 can not be copied to the memory card renamed or deleted The options in the Manage Picture Control menu apply only to the memory card in Slot 1 Custom Picture Controls can not be
142. are 59 94 50 29 97 25 and 23 976 fps respectively options support both xhigh and normal image quality MOV H 264 MPEG 4 Advanced Video Coding Linear PCM Built in monaural or external stereo microphone sensitivity adjustable Index marking time lapse photography 329 Monitor Monitor 8 cm 3 2 in approx 921k dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with approx 170 viewing angle approx 100 frame coverage and automatic monitor brightness control using ambient brightness sensor Playback Full frame and thumbnail 4 9 or 72 images or calendar playback with playback zoom movie playback photo and or movie slide shows histogram display highlights photo information GPS data display and auto image rotation Interface USB Hi Speed USB HDMI output Type C mini pin HDMI connector Accessory terminal Remote cord MC DC2 available separately GPS unit GP 1 available separately Audio input Stereo mini pin jack 3 5mm diameter plug in power supported Audio output Stereo mini pin jack 3 5 mm diameter Supported languages Supportedlanguages Arabic Chinese Simplified and Traditional Czech Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Greek Hindi Hungarian Indonesian Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Portugal and Brazil Romanian Russian Spanish Swedish Thai Turkish Ukrainian Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL15 battery Battery pack Optional M
143. arging is complete Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops flashing Unplug the charger and remove the battery 21 22 The AC Wall Adapter Depending on the country or region of purchase an AC wall adapter may also be supplied with the charger To use the adapter insert it into the charger AC inlet Slide the AC wall adapter latch in the direction shown and rotate the adapter 90 to fix it in the position shown Reverse these steps to remove the adapter Insert the Battery Before inserting the battery rotate the power switch to OFF m Inserting and Removing Batteries Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries 1 Open the battery chamber cover Unlatch and open the battery chamber cover 2 Insert the battery Insert the battery in the orientation shown using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side The latch locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted 3 Close the battery chamber cover Removing the Battery Turn the camera off and open the battery chamber cover Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand 23 24 I The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii xix and 306 308 of this manual Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0
144. asnseaceannensterwemssneease 250 Monitor BrigNtNESS anne nera AR AAO 250 Hage DUSTOR REE PIO Orsonia a E 251 Fiieker Reduction ossa Aa 252 Timezone and Date eo a n E O A O AN 253 Languadges snn T a a a Cera EERE 253 image Comment anasan a E N 253 Auto Moage Rota tioN acasin E ert Oars erre ren cnr er eerrant we iterr 254 Batte MALO niso a i eaieesetnn S 255 GOPV HONE TATONMM At Oisean a E incl cuties 256 Save Load SEULINGS sachets sacs eect wth alike terre teehee teak tase 257 Virtaal HOr ZON assests stash Beer pcuavecss ease AN E 258 ARFRNGC TUNG emecer par meet ta ae U a eer ce Mere n enn me renee ae ere aes 259 Ey OHI WO dG veh satiy costes zesusess A ante noes tesa tucbes ees on eta 260 Firmware V CVSI OM czacctetiiarice thee lait at eta a hal ah ee Caer ta 260 c The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies sssssssssessessessessssssssessssssssesssesscenceseeseeaes 261 creating Retouched CODICES seriosi noa erkak ra eie eer E KONA 262 PEO MINO enee oa a as ee es 264 REG EYV EC ORPECTION ieia A O ER 264 a a T E E E 265 Monocrome eaa O rene iar neve rere er nvr ere ren Serre 266 Fiter ENEC Ouan A acon eduons EE 267 Color Balane E n cacinnveaneo sures ae sas cones aumasnseauesaureereeatetna dau at aouaceaneeasemnavan eens 268 Mage OV STAY 6 sie tases a ese casratte sa aesseqasncaascmaaes ee ao ce riscr ate radia Gesu 269 NEF RAV Pr OGES SIN Os aire aae esutiat wpctee Goch tart aut nisl sessdarien see eae 271 RESIO a e EA AEN 272 QUICK RET
145. balance Preset manual te d 1 Fine tune Edit comment Select image Protect d 1 White balance Al Select image i 100ND600 ie KoM FA as Q VAT tm OK 10 4 Choosing a Source Image To view the image highlighted in Step 4 full frame White balance press and hold the amp QUAL button To view images in other locations hold the BKT button and press A The dialog shown at right will be Playback slot and folder displayed select the desired card and folder M 178 i Slot 2 IMENUL Tia BKT button Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance preset White balance Preset manual Fine tune Edit comment Select image Protect d 1 d 1 d 4 and press to select another preset Fine Tuning Preset White Balance The selected preset can be fine tuned by selecting White balance Fine tune and adjusting white balance as ra i H a d 1 described on page 117 ii l m cu Adjust MOK 125 126 EE Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset White balance 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu and press gt Highlight the desired preset and press Qm ISO Highlight Edit comment and press P Edit the comment as described on page 135 T KEO ACGA PRE Preset manual Adjus
146. ber of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In self timer mode the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 153 each time the shutter release button is pressed regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots 1 227 the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Interval between shots In other modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter soeed and aperture mode P aperture mode or shutter speed modes A and M If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt Auto ISO sensitivity control N 107 in modes P S and A the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded in mode M the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possib
147. bleshooting Basic Photography and Playback Live View Photography Ed Movie Live View Aaa P S A and M Modes 2 User Settings U1 and U2 Modes Release Mode 2 Image Recording Options Focus ISO ISO Sensitivity Exposure WB White Balance Image Enhancement Flash Photography Other Shooting Options cy More on Playback Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes mM X Q The IndeX m ii Q Error Messages RARI E n 81 LO 285 Q amp A Index Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index Taking Photographs m Q Shooting Modes and Framing Options Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots mode 35 39 How do quickly adjust settings for different scenes ss ss 0 45 Can adjust shutter speed to freeze or blur motion mode S 76 Can adjust aperture to blur backgrounds or bring them into focus mode A a How do I make long time exposures mode M 79 Can frame photos in the monitor 8 live view photography 49 Can shoot movies movie live view 57 Can join photographs taken at regular intervals to create a time 168 lapse movie Q Release Modes Can I take photos one at a time or in quick succession 6 83 How do I take pictures with the self timer or a remote control 85 Can reduce shutter noise in quiet surroundings quiet shutter release 6 83 Q Focus Can I choose how the camera focuses 97 100 Can
148. cally according to subject status e Manual focus M Electronic rangefinder can be used Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points Single point AF 9 21 or 39 point dynamic area AF 3D tracking auto area AF Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single AE L servo AF or by pressing art AE L AF L button AUTO 7 1 O 4 2 Y Fa X Ww Auto flash with auto pop up P S A M t1 Manual pop up with button release Approx 12 39 12 39 with manual flash m ft ISO 100 20 C 68 F TTL i TTL flash control using 2 016 pixel RGB sensor is available with built in flash and SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB 400 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR is used with matrix and center weighted metering standard i TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering Flash Flash mode Flash compensation Flash ready indicator Accessory shoe Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Sync terminal White balance White balance Live view Modes Lens servo AF area mode Autofocus Movie Metering Metering method Frame size pixels and frame rate File format Video compression Audio recording format Audio recording device Other options Auto auto with red eye reduction auto slow sync auto slow sync with red eye reduction fill flash red eye reduction slow sync slow sync with red eye reduction rear curtain with slow sync rear curtain sync off Auto FP High Speed Sync suppor
149. camera An area at the center of the image sensor _ Deena te 23 5 x 15 7 mm is used to record pictures in DX 1 5x DX format format To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm format multiply by 1 5 FX format 36 x24 _ wae DX format 24 x 16 image circle gt image circle FX format DX format Image Area The selected option is shown in the information display The Viewfinder Display The DX format crop is shown at right the area outside the crop can be viewed in gray when Off is selected for Custom Setting a4 AF point illumination 222 DX format See Also See page 63 for information on the crops available in movie live view Image area can be set using the Image area option in the shooting menu or by pressing a control and rotating a command dial EE The Image Area Menu 1 Select Image area in the shooting Be Mew menu Storage folder Press MENU to display the menus Highlight T le layed by card in Slot 2 Image area in the shooting menu M 214 J E rage sie and press P PEE OPERE MENU button 2 Choose an option Image area Highlight Auto DX crop or Choose image a area and press P Auto DX crop Choose image area 3 Adjust settings Image area Choose an option and press 68 The p000 ase area selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder m FX G6x24 1o a 90 DX 24x16 1 5x 91 92 Hil Camera Controls 1 Assign image area selection to a camera contr
150. can store up to four values for preset white balance in presets d 1 through d 4 Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used Prece measurement in final photo and white balance measured by camera M 121 Copy from existing photograph White balance is copied from photo on memory card 124 EE Measuring a Value for White Balance 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in mode M adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows 0 M 78 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the on WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel Yon WB button Main command dial Control panel Measuring Preset White Balance Preset manual white balance can not be measured during live view M 49 57 while you are shooting an HDR photograph M 139 or multiple exposure M 160 or when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button 248 121 3 Selecta preset Press the on WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired white balance preset d 1 to d 4 is displayed in the cont
151. ce or existing photograph as reference for white balance M 121 All values are approximate and do not reflect fine tuning if applicable PRE Preset manual White balance is set by pressing the n WB button and rotating the main command dial until the T desired setting is displayed in the r coy control panel Yon WB button Main command Control panel dial 115 116 The Shooting Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance SHOOTING MENU eG NEF RA di option in the shooting menu M 214 which also can be used to fine tune white balance N 117 or measure a value for preset H gt R ge FI as white balance M 121 The Auto option in the White balance Auto distortion control OFF e Col RGB menu offers a choice of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors ANa tth TE which preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent HDR high dynamic range OFF lighting while the Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from the bulb types Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperat
152. ces Failure to The Camera Body Continued 8 Power Connector COVES c ccescsssssesssescsseseeees 299 IK CPU contacts 10 LENS MOU sssinctrarstsrniccioiseotintansiensrecsrin 26 103 Gi AF coupling KP Tripod socket EE Body Cap sccscciscsscssisrcinnnnieaioninaamnnsace 25 298 observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices BE Viewfinder eyepiece ssesssssssssessesesssseesnsnesnn 33 BEJ Rubber CVE CUP sisissnitancarnincrcmmasadacnsamenass 86 1 4 button CN OU EEE E AA 47 189 Formatting memory CALS csssssseeseeseeeeee 31 9 gt button K Playba tK cssesrsvsesaetseiantiteoteaninnantieanies 46 177 Monitor Viewing SOTTINGS sssscscersssssessscscersssseasseseestees 9 LIVE VIEW caa 49 57 Viewing pictures sssesssessssssseesssessseessresseesseesse 46 Full frame playDack cssesssssssesseesesessesseesees 177 MENU button Men ssiessisessesieseitereiessisseriisarsiseisisessinersirisiie 18 207 g1 button RETOUCH sectsczicieustsacsssatsasstnns tes cnaeene 69 261 Picture COMTIOL ssisscsssscssoscososcssvssosossnanonenesss 50 129 i Yom WB button White balance sssssssssseeesssssssssss 115 117 120 Q QUAL button Playback ZOOM in ssssssessssssssseessssssessssseeessssesssss 187 Image quality size essessesesseseeseeseeeees 93 95 The Camera Body Continued Q8 ISO button Playback zoom out thumbnails 185 186 ISO SONS I
153. choose whether the current frame will be ahlar inthe the starting or end point of the copy and abla press 6 End point EE 5 Delete frames If the desired frame is not currently displayed press lt or to advance or rewind to skip to 10 s ahead or back rotate the main command dial to skip to an index or to the first or last frame if the movie Yon WB button contains no indices rotate the sub command dial To switch the current selection from start point to end point F or vice versa press on WB Once you have selected the start point and or end point press A All frames before the selected start point and after the selected end point will be removed from the copy 6 Save the copy Highlight one of the following and press 68 ae e Save as new file Save the copy to a new file eens e Overwrite existing file Replace the original movie file with the edited copy e Cancel Return to Step 5 e Preview Preview the copy Edited copies are indicated by a Micon in full frame playback 70 Trimming Movies Movies must be at least two seconds long If a copy can not be created at the current playback position the current position will be displayed in red in Step 5 and no copy will be created The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient soace available on the memory card Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original The Retouch Menu Movies can also be edited u
154. ck The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Description Press QUAL to zoom in to maximum of approximately 38 x large images in 36 x 24 3 2 format 28 x medium images or 19 x small images Press Q1 ISO to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Zoom in or out View other areas of image Faces up to 35 detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in navigation window Rotate sub command dial to view other faces Select faces Rotate main command dial to view same location in other View other i mae photos at current zoom ratio Playback zoom is cancelled g when a movie is displayed Change protect gep Yon WB See page 188 for more information status Return to gt Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately shooting mode Z Retouch photo 4 amp Create retouched copy of current photograph 69 261 187 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame Zoom thumbnail and calendar playback the o WB button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the T r button or the Delete op
155. cntrl for built in flash Optional flash Exposure comp for flash Modeling flash Auto bracketing set Bracketing order attached f Controls fl OK button shooting mode 1 250 s Auto FP 1 200 s Auto FP 1 200 s 1 160 s 1 1255 1 100 s 1 80 s 1 60 s 1 60 s 1 30 s 1 15 s 1 8 s 1 4 s 1 2 s 1s 2s 4s 8s 15s 30s TTL Manual Repeating flash Commander mode TTL Manual Entire frame Background only default default default default default On default Off AE amp flash AE only Flash only WB bracketing ADL bracketing MTR gt under gt over Under gt MTR gt over default default Displayed only when optional SB 400 flash unit is Select center focus point default Highlight active focus point Not used f Controls f2 Assign Fn button f3 Assign preview button Preview FV lock AE AF lock AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON Flash off Bracketing burst Active D Lighting NEF RAW Matrix metering Center weighted metering Spot metering Framing grid Choose image area default Viewfinder virtual horizon MY MENU Access top item in MY MENU 1 step spd aperture Choose non CPU lens number Playback None Preview FV lock AE AF lock AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON Flash off Bracketing burst Active D Lighting NEF RAW Matrix metering default Center weighted
156. ct Aperture ring for Custom Setting f5 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture M 245 e Non CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode A or M M 288 Camera is slow to respond to shutter release button Select Off for Custom Setting d10 Exposure delay mode M 231 No photo taken when remote control shutter release button is pressed e Replace battery in remote control QI 298 e Choose remote control release mode M 85 e Flash is charging 87 e Time selected for Custom Setting c5 Remote on duration M 228 has elapsed press camera shutter release button halfway e Bright light is interfering with remote Photos are out of focus e Rotate focus mode selector to AF M 97 e Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock M 102 103 Focus does not lock when shutter release button is pressed halfway Use aft AE L AF L button to lock focus when AF C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF A mode Can not select focus point e Unlock focus selector lock 2 101 e Auto area AF or face priority AF selected for AF area mode choose another mode e Camera is in playback mode QI 177 or menus are in use M 207 e Press shutter release button halfway to turn monitor off or start standby timer GI 39 Can not select AF area mode Manual focus selected M 55 103 Only one shot taken each time shutter release bu
157. custom settings Reset custom Flash cntrl for builtin flash TTL i n Exposure comp for flash sett g gt Modeling flash ON CO 22 1 Auto bracketing set AE f Controls OK button shooting mode RESET f2 Assign Fn button e 3 Assign preview button f4 Assign AE L AF L button a 5 Customize command dials az f6 Release button to use dial OFF Movie f6 Release button to use dial OFF f7 Slot empty release lock OK f8 Reverse indicators 0 49 Assign MB D14 amp button ea g1 Assign Fn button OFF Assign preview button a K 219 The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting Reset custom settings 221 d Shooting display a Autofocus d9 LCD illumination al AF C priority selection 221 d10 Exposure delay mode a2 AF S priority selection 221 11 Flash warning a3 Focus tracking with lock on 222 di2 MB D14 battery type a4 AF point illumination 222 4d13 Battery order a5 Focus point wrap around 222 ee Bracketing flash a6 Number of focus points 223 Flash sync speed a7 Built in AF assist illuminator 223 Flash shutter speed b Metering exposure Flash cntrl for built in flash b1 ISO sensitivity step value 224 Exposure comp for flash b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 224 Modeling flash b3 Easy exposure compensation 225 Auto bracketing set b4 Center weighted area 226 Bracketing order b5 Fine tune optimal exposure 226 f Controls c Timers AE lock OK button shooting mode c1
158. d Battery partially discharged _ mm Lowbattery Charge battery or ready spare battery JE bl al al E CA flashes dashes Shutter release disabled Charge or exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter appears in information display Image Sensor Cleaning The camera vibrates the low pass filter covering the image sensor to remove dust when the camera is turned on or off 301 35 36 3 Check the number of exposures remaining The control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings values over 1 000 are rounded 25 56 down to the nearest hundred e g values between 2 000 and 2 099 are shown as 2 0 K If two memory cards are inserted the displays show the space available on the card in Slot 1 21 30 When the number of exposures remaining reaches G the number will flash Ft amp or Fut will flash in the shutter speed displays and the icon for the affected card will flash Insert another memory card M 29 or delete some photos QI 47 189 Step 2 Select a or Mode To shoot where use of a flash is prohibited photograph infants or capture natural lighting under low light conditions rotate the mode dial to AUTO Otherwise rotate the mode dial to a Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the memory card
159. d If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous Rotate Tall MENU button gt playback menu Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures Ea for display during playback Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review Show next Show previous Continue as before Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically rotated for display in the On camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation M 254 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in wide landscape orientation 212 Slide Show MENU button gt gt playback menu Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder M 207 Hidden images M 208 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Choose type of image displayed from Still images and movies Still images only and Movies only Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed Image type To start the slide show highlight Start and press The following operations can be performed while t
160. d pictures are marked by a Em icon Press when the selection is complete 5 Save the resized copies A confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and T Create resized con P 1 image press to save the resized copies Viewing Resized Copies Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed Image Quality Copies created from NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG photos have an image quality M 93 of JPEG fine copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original Quick Retouch MENU button gt r retouch menu Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast Quick retouch D Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit subjects Press A or W to choose the amount of enhancement The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph 273 Straighten MENU button gt 4 retouch menu Create a straightened copy of the selected image Press to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0 25 degrees lt q to rotate it counterclockwise the effect can be previewed in the edit display note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Distortion Control MENU button gt r retouch menu Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion Select Auto to let the cam
161. deleted from or copied to or from the card in Slot 2 136 Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows Active D Lighting P S A and M Modes Only Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day It is most effective when used with matrix metering M 109 Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting amp AAuto M Active D Lighting Versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting 137 138 To use Active D Lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting in the shooting menu To display the menus press the MENU button Highlight Active D Lighting in the shooting menu and press P 2 Choose an option Highlight the desired option and press 68 If amp A Auto is selected the camera will automatically adjust Active D Lighting according to shooting conditions in mode M however amp A Auto is equivalent to EA N Normal Active D Lighting MENU button SHOOTING MENU gt NEF RAW recording White balance AUTO Set Picture Control FISD Manage Picture Control zi Auto dist
162. ds long Datorer Check printer To resume 196 i select Continue if available Paper in printer is not of Insert paper of correct size 196 selected size and select Continue This movie cannot be The selected movie can edited not be edited Check printer Check paper Paper jam Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select 196 printer Continue Insert paper of selected size 7 Printer is out of paper 196 Check ink To resume select 196 Continue Replace ink and select Continue Out of paper Check ink supply Out of ink Printer is out of ink 196 See printer manual for more information 325 326 Specifications EE Nikon D600 Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective pixels Effective pixels 24 3 million Image sensor Image sensor 35 9 x 24 0 mm CMOS sensor Nikon FX format Total pixels 24 7 million Dust reduction System Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data optional Capture NX 2 software required Storage Image size pixels e FX 36x24 image area 6 016 x 4 016 LE 4 512 x 3 008 IM 3 008 x 2 008 FS e DX 24x16 image area 3 936 x 2 624 I I 2 944 x 1 968 IM 1 968 x 1 312 FS e FX format photographs taken in movie live view 6 016 x 3 376 LE 4 512 x 2 528 IM 3 008 x 1 688 FS e DX format photographs in movie live view 3 936 x 2 224 I I 2 944 x 1 664 IMI
163. dvance rate Self timer Remote release modes Exposure Metering Metering method Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F 3 1 m Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen with AF area brackets framing grid can be displayed Quick return Pressing depth of field preview button stops lens aperture down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera other modes Instant return electronically controlled Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses including type G and D lenses some restrictions apply to PC lenses and DX lenses using DX 24 x 16 1 5x image area Al P NIKKOR lenses and non CPU Al lenses A and M modes only IX NIKKOR lenses lenses for the F3AF and non Al lenses can not be used The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the electronic rangefinder supports the center 7 focus points with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f 8 or faster and the center 33 focus points with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f 6 8 or faster Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter 1 4000 30 s in steps of 1 3 or 1 2 EV bulb time requires optional ML L3 remote control X200 X 200 s synchronizes with shutter at 250 s or slower flash range drops at speeds between 1 200 and 1 250 s S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed Q quiet shutter release self timer remote control MuP
164. e 31 Removing Memory Cards After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off turn the camera off open the memory card slot cover and press the card in to eject it The card can then be removed by hand 29 30 No Memory Card If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL15 battery and no za memory card inserted will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder Using Two Memory Cards Slot 1 is for the main card the card in slot 2 plays a backup or secondary role If the default setting of Overflow is selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 21 96 when two memory cards are inserted the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is full A t Pusto EET N The control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a FA memory card the example at right shows the icons displayed when a card is inserted in each slot If the memory card is full or locked or an error has occurred the icon for the affected card will flash 0 324 xag SON SOF ON 0e DO OM0F 2s Me 0 Information display M Memory Cards e Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied t
165. e Live View To hide or display indicators in the monitor during movie live view press the Ei button Information off 25 55 200 Virtual horizon Framing guides Q258 62 Image Area Regardless of the option selected for Image area in the shooting menu M 89 all movies and photographs recorded in movie live view QJ 57 have an aspect ratio of 16 9 Images recorded with On selected for Image area gt Auto DX crop and a DX lens attached use a DX based movie format as do images recorded with DX 24x16 1 5x selected for Image area gt Choose image area An FX based movie format is used when FX 36 x 24 1 0x is selected A el icon is displayed when the DX based movie format is selected Movie Live View Photographs The following table shows the size of photographs taken in movie live view Image area Option Size pixels Print size cm in FX based f i Large 6 016 x 3 376 50 9 x 28 6 20 1 x 11 3 a 4 512 x 2 528 38 2X21 4 15 0x 84 35 5 x 20 0 mm 3 008 x 1 688 25 5 x 14 3 10 0 x 5 6 2 944 x 1 664 24 9 x 14 1 9 8x 5 5 23 5 x 13 2 mm 1 968 x 1 112 16 7 x 9 4 66x 3 7 Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Image quality is determined by the option selected for Image quality in the shooting menu 93 Large 3 936 x 2 224 33 3 x 18 8 13 1 x 7 4 DX based format J
166. e able to focus on dark or low contrast subjects 287 288 Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens Compatible Non CPU Lenses When using non CPU lenses and accessories rotate the camera mode dial to A or M and set aperture using the lens aperture ring In other modes the shutter release is disabled Non CPU lens data M 172 can be used to enable many of the features available with CPU lenses including color matrix metering if no data are provided center weighted metering will be used in place of color matrix metering while if the maximum aperture is not provided the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring Y Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following can NOT be used with the D600 TC 16AS AF teleconverter AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm f 2 8 AF Non Al lenses 200mm f 3 5 ED AF Teleconverter TC 16 Lenses that require the AU 1 focusing unit PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 or 400mm f 4 5 600mm f 5 6 800mm f 8 earlier 1200mm f 11 PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 851001 Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 8mm f 8 906200 OP 10mm f 5 6 PC 35mm f 3 5 old type 2 1cm f 4 Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type Extension Ring K2 Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers 142361 143000 174041 174180 Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers 360 1200
167. e all o photographs from the print order select MENU button Deselect all Select set Deselect all 2 Select pictures g POF pint order elect se Use the multi selector to scroll through the gp100ND600 e 014 074 pictures on the memory card to view pen Kom Fd images in other locations hold the BKT aa Eor haa button and press A To display the current Tr r N picture in full screen press and hold the Q QUAL button To select the current picture for printing hold the Q ISO button and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the amp amp ISO button pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected SX Han ae S DSC_0001 JPG 15 04 2012 10 02 28 Qe ISO A V Choose number of copies 3 Display imprint options gy OF it order Press k to display data imprint options Done OO Print shooting data O Print date 202 4 Select imprint options ge DPOF print order Select set Highlight the following options and press gt to toggle the highlighted option on or off to Done complete the print order without including this information proceed to Step 5 e Print shooting data Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order e Print date Prin
168. e cursor in the Preview column and press A or to highlight Overlay ki 3 ei Press to preview the overlay as shown at right g 5 to save the overlay without displaying a preview EEA select Save To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain press Q ISO 6 Save the overlay Press K while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be displayed full frame in the monitor 1 100ND600 DSC_0013 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2012 10 02 27 Fx 36016x4016 V Image Overlay Only NEF RAW photographs with the same image area and bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture shooting mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1 The current image comment is appended to the overlay when it is saved copyright information however is not copied Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression NEF RAW Processing MENU button gt r4 retouch menu Create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs 1 Select NEF RAW processing M _RETOUCH MEND Highlight NEF RAW processing in the retouch Redeye correction menu and
169. e groups M 237 EE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 12 39 m ft ISO 100 20 C 68 F EE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing Flash entri for built in flash a strobe light effect Press lt or P to highlight the following wcll options A or W to change K4 Output Times Frequency D De Option Description AR SICH ees ila Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected output Note that depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second Times Flash Control Mode The flash control mode for the built in flash is shown in the information display M 146 wam son ERDF ON eA DO OM0F 52s Me 0 Manual and Repeating Flash icons flash in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The SB 400 When an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached and turned on Custom Setting e3 changes to Optional flash allowing the flash control mode for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and Manual Repeating flash and Commander mode options are not available Times The options available for Repeating Flash gt Times are determined by flash output Output Opt
170. e inserted into the MB D14 not the camera Do not attempt to use the camera with power connectors inserted into both the camera and MB D14 e Filters intended for special effects photography may interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder e The D600 can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use C PL or C PL II circular polarizing filters instead e Use NC filters to protect the lens e To prevent ghosting use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame e Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1 x Y44 Y48 Y52 056 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 See the filter manual for details e DK 20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses Lenses are available with diopters of 5 4 3 2 0 0 5 1 2 and 3 m when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the neutral position 1 m Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 3 to 1 m Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved The rubber eyecup can not be used with eyepiece correction lenses e Magnifying Eyepiece DK 21M The DK 21M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1 17 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m t for greater precisi
171. e playback menu M 202 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 e Index print To create an index print of all JPEG pictures M 93 on the memory card proceed to Step 4 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 199 200 3 Select pictures or choose a date If you chose Print select or Print DPOF in Step 2 use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card to view images in other locations hold the BKT button press A and select the desired card and folder as described on page 178 To display the current picture full screen press and hold the amp QUAL button To select the current picture for printing hold the Q7 ISO button and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the amp amp ISO button pressed press A or VW to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press V when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected If you chose Select date in Step 2 press A or V to highlight a date and press gt to toggle the highlighted date on or off To view the pictures taken on the selected date press Qe ISO Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures or press and hold Q QUAL to view the current picture full screen Press amp ISO again to return to the date selection d
172. e re 7 oN Viewfinder Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer 227 Selecting a Preset Selecting Preset manual for the White balance option in the shooting menu displays the dialog shown at right highlight a preset and press If no value currently exists for the selected preset white balance will be set to 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight Qana mm OKAY 18 123 124 EE Copying White Balance from a Photograph Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset 1 Select PRE Preset manual for White balance in the shooting menu Press the MENU button and select White balance in the shooting menu Highlight Preset manual and press P 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press 1 ISO 3 Choose Select image Highlight Select image and press gt 4 Highlight a source image Highlight the source image 5 Press Press to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment M 253 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset White balance a Choose color temp PRE Preset manual White balance ac ie Ra d 1 QE ram OK RY 18 White
173. e than 0 01 being missing or defective Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit white red blue or green or always off black this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended Batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat e Keep the battery terminals clean e Turn the product off before replacing the battery e Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal cover These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function If the battery will not be used for some time insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a loca
174. e the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 available separately Q 298 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications 305 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio tr
175. ecording 8 Exit live view mode Press the L button to exit live view mode 59 Indices If Index marking is selected for Custom Setting g1 Assign Fn ae m me button M 247 92 Assign preview button 248 or g3 ay gt 5 Assign AE L AF L button M 248 you can press the button Ei gt gt during recording to add indices that can be used to locate Y 3 frames during editing and playback M 68 Up to 20 indices can EP Ea be added to each movie See Also Frame size microphone sensitivity and card slot options are available in the Movie settings menu M 65 Focus can be adjusted manually as described on page 55 The roles played by the Fn depth of field preview and it AE L AF L buttons can be chosen using Custom Settings f1 OK button shooting mode M 241 g1 Assign Fn button M 247 g2 Assign preview button M 248 and g3 Assign AE L AF L button 248 respectively the last three options also allow you to lock exposure without having to keep a button pressed Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button A 248 controls whether the shutter release button can be used to start movie live view or to start and end movie recording 60 The Live View Display Movie Live View AF S Joni 7 4 CD 8 5 Fob ten T D No movie icon Headphone volume 62 Microphone sensitivity Microphone sensitivity for movie recording 62 Sound level for audio recording Displayed in red
176. ed you can select the card from which pictures will be deleted EE Selected Deleting Selected Photographs 1 in the playback menu Press the MENU button and select Delete in the playback menu Highlight Selected and press gt Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp QUAL button to view images in other locations hold the BKT button press A and select the desired card and folder as described on page 178 Press the Qm ISO button to select the highlighted picture Selected pictures are marked by a tT icon Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional pictures to deselect a picture highlight it and press Q ISO MENU button Qm ISO button Delete All Slot 1 Slot 2 Delete Choose Selected for the Delete option ey fom Selected gt Select date ALL All Highlight a picture Delete gt Selected i 100ND600 G KoM FA wy i i QE O PAT am OK 10 4 Select the highlighted picture Delete gt Selected i 100ND600 A et Ree FA 100 1 100 2 100 3 100 4 100 5 100 6 OE OFAN OKO 4 4 Press to complete the operation A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press EE Select Date Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date 1 Choose Select date In the delete menu highlight Select date and press gt Ej Highlight a
177. eees 148 K appears when memory remains for over g 1000 exposures ssessssssessssssessersssssevorrarossersrscscsse 36 When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The Information Display Press the EJ button to display shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining AF area mode and other shooting information in the monitor 24s 23 Et cy 3fps P 10 al Cat NORM ie L 11 ERATO O PAAA 22 7 m NK 21 dcg a 19 18 a k 15 JE Shooting mode ia isten schists 35 40 73 JF Flexible program indicator ssssccsssssesssseseen 75 JEJ Flash sync indicator cssssssseesssssssseesenssessee 234 UD Shutter speed e eesesessssessseesssecsssscesseeessseeesss 76 78 Exposure compensation value c csceeeeee 112 Flash compensation valUe sss sssssessssessse00s 148 Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence ssseesssssssssssseessssssesssss 153 Number of shots in WB bracketing SEGU ENCE xscccesicttrrirencinaucnciia 156
178. eeossseeosseressseeesseeossseeesssee Eoleg aa A EE EN EAE A EAA E rrrere Vignette CONO eset exsecirseeesacertscaiorraceccsesesis TEE E Long Exposure NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction HOMIS ONR canina Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings ssssssecsecsessessesssssessssssessesscseeseeseeseeseeses 219 RESCE CUSTOM Setting S sirecrces acceler eee eee renee ee each 221 PUL ONO GUIS setts rewsssbcses e vee ON ela O 221 a AP GiPRIOFy SCISCTION sin 221 AZ AF S FOLLY Selections ana aA AAS 221 a3 FOCUS Tracking with Lock On ss sssessssessseesssessssessseessseesseessseossseosseroseesssesssseesss 222 a4 AF Point UUM ATION e amp cascsincsscasnsasacessverosesanorgnnsnosssadr nnsnnsenesgasynanisnvedesasatvtentvanibes 222 ab FOCUS POINt Wrap Around asscnni eren ea AS 222 a6 N mber of FOCUS POINTS iscesssesisscusssscdvaiesassevossedosstansueesessesonde obecensassssorsbaasveomnanscesbes 223 a7 Built in AF assist IUMINAtON cscccecsscecscescecsssecscsscssssseccsscesassecssassscessecssaes 223 Ds METENING EXMOOSUIG narraire aaa ee een oa et oe decane erga 224 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step ValUe uuu sessssesscsssecssesscsesecsssecscsesecsssecscseseesssecessesecesseees 224 52 EV Steps fOr Exposure Chthl nosiocu 224 b3 Easy Exposure Compensation seseesssessseessseesseessseessseesseesseessseeosseesseessseosseeessees 225 b4 Center Weighted Area csssssssssscssssssssssecsssesscsssecsssesscssseesssecsssesessesecs
179. eeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place Wireless Remote Control ML L3 The ML L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery Pressing the battery chamber latch to the right insert a fingernail into the gap and open the battery chamber Ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct orientation The D600 is equipped with an accessory terminal for MC DC2 remote cords A 79 and GP 1 GPS units M 175 which connect with the lt mark on the connector aligned with the gt next to the accessory terminal close the camera connector cover when the terminal is not in use Stereo Microphone ME 1 V 61 Wireless Mobile Adapter WU 1b Supports two way communication between the camera and smart devices running the Wireless Mobile Adapter Utility Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter 1 Ready the camera Open the battery chamber and power connector covers 2 Insert the EP 5B power connector Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation shown using the connector to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side The latch locks the connector in place when the connector is fully inserted 3 Close the battery chamber cover Position the power connector cable so that it passes through the power connector slot and close the battery chamber cover
180. efore proceeding Select additional images a Highlight pictures and press Q1 ISO to select or deselect to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the Q QUAL button Selected images are marked with av Press 9 to proceed to Step Qm igo button 7 when your selection is complete Choose Select destination folder i Highlight Select destination folder and press gt Copy image s Select source Select image s Copy image s Select image s 100ND600 gt Copy image s Images selected by default Deselect all gt Select all images Select protected images Deselect all 1 100ND600 B EAP 100 1 100 2 100 3 k 1 100 5 100 6 QNI A E OK 0 Copy image s Select source i Select image s 100 Select destination folder 102 gt Copy image s 8 Select a destination folder To enter a folder number choose Select Copy image s Select folder by number folder by number enter the number QO 215 and press If the folder with the 480A selected number does not already exist a new folder will be created uc ea ee To choose from a list of existing folders ps mina 7 a elect folder from list choose Select folder from list highlight a 100ND600 n 10IND600 CG folder and press 6 z 103ND600 9 Copy the images Highlight Copy image s and press g C0 imasels Select source i Select image s 100 Select destination folder 102 Copy image
181. eft and negative values on the right f9 Assign MB D14 amp amp Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the function assigned to the aft AE L AF L button on the optional MB D14 battery pack Option AE AF lock AE lock only M AE lock Hold fa AF lock only YM AF ON FV lock Same as Fn button Description Focus and exposure lock while the MB D14 et AE L AF L button is pressed Exposure locks while the MB D14 ar AE L AF L button is pressed Exposure locks when the MB D14 art AE L AF L button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires Focus locks while the MB D14 et AE L AF L button is pressed Pressing the MB D14 fet AE L AF L button initiates autofocus The shutter release button can not be used to focus Press the MB D14 art AE L AF L button to lock flash value built in flash and compatible optional flash units only Q 149 294 Press again to cancel FV lock The MB D14 it AE L AF L button performs the function selected for Custom Setting f2 1 242 g1 Assign Fn Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the Fn button during movie live view the default option is None Option Index marking View photo shooting info AE AF lock AE lock only M AE lock Hold fa AF lock only YZ AF ON None Description Press the button during movie recording to add an index at the current position M 6
182. en 100 and Hi 2 and shutter speed to values between 1 25 s and 4 000 s the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame rate Q 65 In other modes shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically If the result is over or under exposed exit and restart movie live view 6 Start recording Press the movie record button to start recording A recording indicator and the time available are displayed in the monitor Exposure is set using matrix metering and can be locked by pressing the art AE L AF L button 40 110 or in modes P S and A altered by up to 3 EV in steps of Movie record button 1 3 EV using exposure compensation M 112 In Recording indicator autofocus mode focus can be locked by pressing the shutter release button halfway Time remaining Audio The camera can record both video and sound do not cover the microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording Note that the built in microphone may record sounds made by the lens during autofocus or vibration reduction 7 End recording Press the movie record button again to end recording Recording will end automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full Maximum Length The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB for maximum recording times see page 65 note that depending on memory card write speed shooting may end before this length is reached M 334 Taking Photog
183. enses M 33 297 Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery M 21 35 Displays turn off without warning Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer or c4 Monitor off delay M 227 228 Control panel and viewfinder displays are unresponsive and dim The response times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction If the Camera Stops Responding In extremely rare instances the displays may not respond as expected and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery taking care to avoid burns and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again If the problem persists contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Shooting All Modes Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled e Memory card is locked full or not inserted CO 29 31 e Built in flash is charging GZ 39 e Camera is not in focus M 38 e CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f number If FE is displayed in control panel sele
184. era correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector or select Manual to reduce distortion manually note that Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortion control see page 217 Press to reduce barrel distortion lt to reduce pin cushion distortion the effect can be previewed in the edit display note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at an image area setting of FX 36x24 1 0x Auto Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses PC fisheye and certain other lenses excluded Results are not guaranteed with other lenses Fisheye MENU button gt r retouch menu Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye lens Press to increase the effect this also increases the amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image lt q to reduce it The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy 274 Color Outline MENU button gt r retouch menu Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for ae painting The effect can be previewed in t
185. erssees 61 62 Help sseseesseessssesseesssessseeoseesseessseesseesseess 18 Hi Sensitivity sstecnsracraneiiciet 106 Hide 1MAGE sscessessssessssssseesesenes 208 High definition 204 333 High Dynamic Range HDR 139 High ISO NR ssssssseessssseeesssssecrsssssee 218 Highlights c sesecsecsesseseeees 180 209 Histogram seceeseeeeeee 180 181 209 I Image area 26 63 89 91 95 IMAGE COMME NL ceseeecseseseeeeeee 253 Image Dust Off ref photo 251 Image OVETAY c cecsececsesecsecseeeeees 269 IMAGE QUALITY esecsecsssessseeseeseees 93 Image review 171 177 212 IMAQE S ZE eeennnaeenieermnr arene rennet 95 Image type Slide show 213 Incandescent White balance 115 Index marking 60 68 247 339 340 Index print eeeecescseseesesesecseeeeeees 199 In focus indicator 38 102 103 Information esseseesecseseeseesees 9 179 Information display 9 231 Interval timer shooting 164 ISO display and adjustment 229 ISO sensitivity eeeeeeeeeeees 105 107 ISO sensitivity settings 107 ISO sensitivity step value 224 Sl EES 143 146 237 J JPEG ieee emo ee eo eo 93 JPEG DASIC A suanmmiuemiauiien 93 JPEG COMPFESSION csceseseeeeeee 94 JPEGHMING scctsinuiatiimenmadisine 93 JPEG NOM MAL sGaccuwiadeieowen 93 L L large sccccsimmmoncmunsie 63 95 Landscape Set Picture Control
186. es PC fisheye and certain other lenses excluded results are not guaranteed with other lenses Before using auto distortion control with DX lenses select On for Auto DX crop or choose an image area of DX 24x16 1 5x 1 90 selecting other options may result in heavily cropped photographs or in photographs with severe peripheral distortion Retouch Distortion Control For information on creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin cushion distortion see page 274 Color Space MENU button gt shooting menu The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose sRGB for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification Adobe RGB has a wider color gamut and is recommended for images that will be extensively processed or retouched after leaving the camera Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB ph
187. esesscseseces 226 b5 Fine tune Optimal EXPOSUTE sssesseesseesscesscesscesseoseesseessessecssecsseesscesscesseossesscesseess 226 TICS AE LOC R aatar a A 226 c1 Shutter Release Button AE L sssessssessseesssessseeossersseessseessseesseeoseeosseeosseesssersseesss 226 Cotan doy UME anais a a A T beestiuenawneaciss 227 Ee ET E E A E A E OE uses 227 cA MONtOro DElAY ssrin a EO E 228 Cot Remote om DURATION oenen a 228 a SHIOOUIIG D Dla Vona ERA NER 228 dI BECP nnii ia E E E heaes 228 d2 Viewfinder Grid Display cscssssssssssssesssssssessssecsssscsesssscsessssecssscsesecsecessncseesees 229 d3 ISO Display and Adjustment sesessssessseesssessseessseesseessseeosseesseessseosserosseesseesssessss 229 dA Sareen TIDS raaa A A TA EAE 229 d5 CL Mode Shooting Spee nesoni ana e AT N 229 d6 Max CONTINUOUS Release sssini iniii riii 230 d7 File NUMBERS COU GIICE seroenennie ea A ieee ethse 230 d8 Information Display siri aee sona 231 19D UIP VeATIO IA aeo T 231 d10 Exposure Delay Mode avs cesstcicstnseelessiucsuseesssasesSvoseseosctensesetensvccnstaasestededessevuetedess 231 dT Fas TY Warn erer E E RO RE a 231 C12 MB D14 Battery Tye orien a n E ATA 232 dlo Batte Orde oe a a As 233 Bracketing aS iesise anae R A A ae eeteeee eases 234 er Fas NSyNC o DEC rE E E 234 eA Flash SIU EECT SIGE d aaa A E E EEI 235 e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in FlaSh ssssesssssesssseesssseessseessseesosseesssseesnseeessseeosseeossseessssee 236 e
188. ess to proceed to the next step 5 Turn daylight saving time on or off Daylight saving time options will be displayed Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press 6 6 Set the date and time The dialog shown at right will be displayed Press lt or P to select an item A or VW to change Press to set the clock and exit to shooting mode Language LANG e tina DEII Deutsch L Engish Espa ol EAAnvik Frangais Indonesia Time zone London Casablanca UTC O 01 01 2012 00 00 00 30K Time zone and date Date format Y M D Year Month Day M D Y Month Day Year D WY Day Month Year Time zone and date Daylight saving time On Time zone and date Date and time Y MD HM S 12004015 1000 00 2 28 Setting the Clock Language and date time settings can be changed at any time using the Language M 253 and Time zone and date M 253 options in the setup menu The camera clock can also be synchronized with GPS devices M 175 The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter M 297 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the camera displays a warning at startup stating that the clock i
189. ess ovnseisensoseessensossessiassneoben a a a a 301 E NON aa E E E eae ee 301 Clean at Startup Shutdown ssessssessseessseesseesssessseeosseesseesnseessseesserssseeosesosseeossersseesss 302 Manyak leaniiO ss E 303 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions sss essseesssessssessseessseessseesssersssesssseosss 306 Available SEUNG S pesannya eanrisiadicdsavatesveaasshaaeestiesadee daceonines 309 DE U ae E E E E A E E 312 Exposure Program Mode P ssssssssssssssssscscsescsssssscscsssssssessesesesessssesescsescseseeseseseseseeees 315 Troubleshooting ennan EAEE 316 BY A A O A I 316 Shooting All Modes es esesessseessseesseesssesssseosseesseesnseessseesseeoseessseeosseesseeonsesssseosseesseessseess 317 Shooting P SA M cesdcccstcstcosstseseceidsoieestecapecssterdecstnenstiasteiacesirseaeestlatunietea nse tarewece 319 PVO r E E EAE T E EEE 320 Miscelaneos irsinin ear Eae E EEEREN 321 ENOR MICE ACS E E EA TEA 322 SIDEME O oane 326 Approved Memory Cals vcdearsencsriercsscsnciencnnaratasecsqrasseeediesedesnttenonatannasecinteaanniam ences 334 Memory Card Capacity csssscsssssecscssssssssssssscscssssssssssesscecsssesscassssessesssececsssesessseseeseaces 335 Baer LE ee nee rere ee rere eet E E one eee ee 337 DEV gt AE E AA E T E E E E 338 xvii xviii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety befo
190. essed Auto area AF The focus point for auto area AF is selected automatically manual focus point selection is not available See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a4 AF point illumination 222 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a5 Focus point wrap around 222 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a6 Number of focus points A 223 For information on changing the role of the button see Custom Setting f1 OK button shooting mode M 241 101 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus M 98 focus lock can also be used to recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at the same distance as your original subject Focus lock is most effective when an option other than auto area AF is selected for AF area mode M 99 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder 2 Lock focus AF A and AF C focus modes With the shutter release button pressed halfway press the aft AE L AF L button
191. essesssesses 145 Recent settings c cecscssececssseeeees 283 Red intensifier Filter effects 267 Red eye correction s sssessssessssere 264 Red eye reduction 144 145 Release button to use dial 246 Release mode nsssesseeseessesssesseese 6 83 Release mode dial c0000 6 83 Release mode dial lock release 6 83 Remote control 6 83 85 298 Remote control mode 0 85 Remote cord uu eceseeeeees 79 88 298 Remote mirror up Remote control mode s esssserssseressseersss 85 Remote on duration 228 Remove items My Menu 281 Removing the lens from the CONVICT Qs ier ccrterererrntdationsrertc rereceenceicie 26 Repeating flash ssssssssseseesees 236 Reset eee eee meer een arene 151 214 221 Reset custom settings 004 221 Reset shooting Menu 06 214 Reset user SETTINGS esesseceeeeeees 82 MOSIZC secure tstieanienieactaunienet 272 Restoring default settingg 151 214 221 312 Retouch MANU ecssscseeseeseeseees 261 Reverse iNdicators cssscscseees 246 RGD in eatitinsriediatins 180 217 Role played by card in Slot 2 96 Rotate tall esses 212 S S SMall snssssesesssseesssserssseesssseessss 63 95 Save selected frame 69 72 SAVE user settings cessecesseseeecseees 81 Save load settings c ssecseceeeees 257 Saving camera setting 257 Scene Mode wicsssssassscosesseosar
192. esssessscssesssesssessecssesaseessesseeeseesses 36 Step 3 Frame the Photograph ccsssssssssessesssecscsssecsesssscsesscsssecsssesecsssecssseseceeseessseesenees 37 AOPA IS cares cea cepe ee catepscc AE NEEE 38 OPS SOO ca sicseopceststsee EEE OEE ES 38 Creative Photography Scene Modes sssssssscsssssessssssecsssssesscsesssscacsesessssssesseasseesesees 40 BE POW a odio iri arama ou ain ean Re a 41 Eae c NC AEE E E E E A N E E E ET 41 AE a o EE E A E E E E A A A E A 41 O a A S 41 SAR e i o MONEN A AET A O E A A N E T E T 42 Nigt OMAN AI nunnana E A 42 Rie lai Eel gre ier ola enn TEN 42 DNs 1574 16 OOT sirrinin eannan eede Pee at OPT 42 fo BAC SNOW iope Raa tans Eaa iSe Erna aaae tans aei EAEra SORAR 43 STU a E ree er ee 43 Oe SA I seagate ct can ews ttneeccccnet te steak eet techs atest 43 oo Hd cl to Gene Emenee ener E 43 Gao e g A O E E E near en Rear es anne reer err errant err 44 SBO SON e E A E E E AE eects 44 PUL an COON ninasista aaia rh ree a 44 M OS sae E E seen eee 44 Fro 1 E 0 E A eer N A TN 45 T E S A E E E A AR 45 OE e ecu secant een ec vetsuces eae ne cee 45 BIG NY aS gees cao A E se ners aie eect oie 46 Deleting Unwanted PAOotograpn ccsssssssssesssssssssssecsssssscssscsssecsssessssssecessesssseseesssees 47 Live View Photography 49 FOCUSING IN UVE VIEW esiseina a iaa ieaiai 51 The Live View Display Live View Photography csssessssssesssss
193. etting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots 4 227 If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded 157 EE ADL Bracketing The camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of exposures For more information on Active D Lighting see page 137 1 Select ADL bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e6 Auto G bracketing set WB WB bracketing e ADL bracketing 3 ds 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active D Lighting off and another at the value currently selected for Active D Lighting in the shooting menu if Active D Lighting is off the second shot will be taken with Active D Lighting set to Auto Choose three shots to take a series of photographs with Active D Lighting set to Off Normal and High Number of shots 1 D Bracketing progress i Ra indicator BKT button Main command dial Control panel BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder see right the control panel will show Mam 158 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera will vary Active D Lighting shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected While bracketing is in effect a bracketing
194. eview button is pressed M 77 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected e6 Auto Bracketing Set MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing M 153 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AE to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only to perform only flash level bracketing WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing M 156 or ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D Lighting M 158 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG e7 Bracketing Order MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN exposure flash and white balance bracketing are performed in the order described on pages 153 and 156 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing f1 OK Button Shooting Mode MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the button during shooting selecting the center focus point RESET Select center focus point highlighting the active focus point 3 Highlight active focus point or none Not used 241 242 f2 Assign Fn Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the Fn b
195. ewfinder interfering with exposure remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap 1 86 165 166 Interval Timer Photography Interval timer photography can not be combined with long time exposures bulb photography A 79 or live view 1 49 or time lapse M 168 photography and is not available in movie live view M 57 or when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button M 248 Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In Cu continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of up to 5 5 shots per second In S single frame and Ct continuous low speed modes photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d5 CL mode shooting speed M 229 in mode Q camera noise will be reduced Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure flash or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval ti
196. fire whenever a picture is taken Metering Select matrix or center weighted metering to activate i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 143 Flash Mode The flash modes available vary with shooting mode a 2 Z U S t1 4 4 Auto slowsync gt a auto Auto on yn Fill flash LOW red eye reduction i 2 T Auto red eye reduction autoj Auto slow sync nD O SLOW Off off PA S M Fill flash i Fill flash Red eye reduction P i Red eye reduction Slow sync red eye reduction Rear curtain sync REAR Slow sync SLOW Rear curtain slow sync REAR SLOW is displayed when setting is complete E REAL AL To choose a flash mode press the button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel EO button Main command dial Control panel Lowering the Built in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place 144 Default Flash Modes Default flash modes are shown below Default Default a 2 2 8 z Auto slow sync Auto red eye reduction 1 P S A M Fill flash Flash Modes The flash modes listed on the previous page may combine one or more of the following settings as shown by the flash mode icon AUTO auto flash When lighting is poor or s
197. flashes flashes Shutter release disabled Change batteries 232 d13 Battery Order MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the WEZENN battery pack are used first when an optional MB D14 battery pack is attached Note that if the MB D14 is powered by an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector the AC D600 Use camera battery first adapter will be used regardless of the option selected K MBM Use MB D14 batteries first A icon is displayed in the camera control panel when the batteries in the MB D14 are in use The MB D14 Battery Pack The MB D14 takes one EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery or six AA alkaline Ni MH or lithium batteries an EN EL15 is supplied with the camera AA batteries are available separately The information display shows the type of battery inserted in the MB D14 as follows MB D14 battery type display Battery type p Aa EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery c ii RARE 7 AA batteries 233 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Auto FP high speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached M 294 If the built in flash or other flash units are used shutter speed is set ace to 1 250 s When the camera shows a shutter speed of 250s in mode P or A
198. for use with the MH 25 only Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement Purchase a new EN EL15 battery EN EL15 Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL15 shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels M 35 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged M 255 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED VR Focal length scale index Mounting index CPU contacts Q 287 Rear lens cap Focal length scale Lens hood Lens cap Focus mode switch CA 26 103 Vibration reduction ON OFF switch Zoom ring Vibration reduction mode switch Focus ring Q 55 103 1 Turn the camera off 2 Removethe rear lens cap and the camera body cap 25 3 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting index on the lens aligned with the mounting index on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount D Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it c
199. formation 179 209 PICTBridGe ssssssecsssesseeeeees 196 333 Picture Controls 00 129 131 Picture SiZe ssesseessesssesseesrersressee 291 PILCHING ccasiomenniimeewunns 258 Playback ccinnminteotuinmnnanis 46 177 Playback display option 209 Playback fOolder essssessseseseesees 207 Playback information 179 209 Playback MenU ssssessssesssseerssscees 207 Playback slot and folder 178 Playback ZOOM cssssssesssseeseesesees 187 Portrait Set Picture Control 129 Power Connector eseese 297 299 Power SWItCN ccsesesesssssssseseseeteseees 1 Predictive focus tracking 97 Preset manual White balance 115 121 Press the shutter release button all the way down cccseseee 38 39 Press the shutter release button halIWAY ccusiicunninieeonnies 38 39 Preview button 77 244 248 Print DPOF wsssscssscsdacsacassstissctacosdaacs 199 Print select eeucsescsteateestiaccraceacetes 199 Printing eessesssessessosesesssesseessessessseoseee 196 Programmed AUtO c scssceceseeees 75 Protecting photographs 188 e QUICK FETOUCH sssesesesseesssesseeseesesesss 273 Quick response remote Remote control MOE eeccsecesesesseeeeees 85 Quiet shutter release 0 6 83 R Rank items My Menu 06 282 RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 Role played by card in Slot 2 96 Rear curtain SYNC esssesss
200. gs 45 4 button Flash mode Flash compensation Bracketing AF mode button Autofocus mode AF area mode Exposure compensation 2 7 button Metering ISO sensitivity Auto ISO sensitivity control 12 EE Scene Mode Choose a scene SCENE M 40 cies ll en Portrait wam SON HBA ON BSH Ch Om 2s amp amp 0 SCENE mode Maincommand dial Monitor EE image Quality and Size Set image quality M 93 Choose an image size M 95 Q QUAL button Sub command dial Control panel HE Autofocus Choose an autofocus mode OQ 98 Choose an AF area mode a 100 AF mode button Sub command dial Control panel 13 14 EE SO Sensitivity Set ISO sensitivity A 105 Set auto ISO sensitivity control Q 107 EE Exposure Qe ISO button Sub command dial Control panel Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed mode P Q 75 Choose a shutter speed mode S or M Q 76 78 iS Q p oJ O ll Main command dial Mode P ModeSorM Main command dial rr Z E L mj Control panel Control panel Choose an aperture mode A or M 77 78 Choose a metering option mode P S A or M 109 Set exposure compensation mode P
201. h make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D14 multi power battery pack are given below CIPA standard One EN EL15 battery camera Approximately 900 shots One EN EL15 battery MB D14 Approximately 900 shots Six AA alkaline batteries MB D14 Approximately 450 shots Nikon standard 2 One EN EL15 battery camera Approximately 3900 shots One EN EL15 battery MB D14 Approximately 3900 shots Six AA alkaline batteries MB D14 Approximately 1300 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S NIKKOR 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5G ED VR lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s flash fired once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S NIKKOR 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5G ED VR lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG basic image size set to M medium shutter speed 1 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once standby timer expires The following can reduce battery life Using the monitor Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway Repeated autofocus operations Taking NEF RAW photographs Slow
202. h the lens pointing up or down Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu M 212 254 Battery Info MENU button gt setup menu View information on the battery currently inserted in the Battery info camera Item Charge No of shots Battery age Charge No of shots Battery age 0 4 Description The current battery level expressed as a percentage The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance A five level display showing battery age 0 4 indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 8 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the battery age display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher The MB D14 Battery Pack The display for the MB D14 battery pack is shown at right If AA Battery info D600 MB D14 batteries are used the battery level will be shown by a battery level Charge 7a 100 icon other items will not be displayed No
203. h tyYpe ss sssssssesssrosessosoressoserrsssreoessssres 143 292 Commander MOAE c ccsessssessessssessseessseesesees 237 8 Flash MOde sssssssssessssssssrssssssssrssssssssrssssseserresss 144 Flash control ccesesesesesseseseeeeees 236 294 295 a Flash COMPENSATION c sccssesssseesscsesssesessees 148 KJ Camera name 11 Ae e i aieinneandanenunumnencwatne 89 12 Folder number frame number 0 215 White balance u sesssesssssssssssecssseescsesesseees 115 Color tOMpPeLatule cecesecscsesseseseseeees 120 White balance fine tuning ssss sssse s 117 Preset MANUAl siascsssssssasseoacsoenterssasreoseresesansates 121 Colors pal Esruran ees 217 15 Picture COntrol sss sssssssssssssressssrrreesssrressssressssrn 129 K Quick adjust eee 132 Original Picture Control sesse 135 Sharpening ss ssessssssessoesseosssessesosesssoerassoseeessee 132 18 COM ISU aN 132 19 Brig tress a racaactinainceaacntenencicatcale 132 CAULALION eonenni 132 Filter effects gt sccscccscosetsstopsscesanermeieednawnanen 132 PUA ose srctersteces pe esaasteeeened ester eeaeees 132 TONING Pencreeneatienanarea 132 133 High ISO noise reduction ccscseseseeeeees 218 Long exposure noise reduction 218 23 Active D Lighting sssss ssssssesssssssessssterssseseesssse 137 HDR exposure differential 139 ADR smoothing ssicsascssnscndscaczcansacibondscasansnazcreece 139 Vignette contro hesrsssra
204. hat allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card Exif version 2 3 The camera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 3 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PictBridge is a trademark The SD SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD 3C LLC HDMI the HMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holde
205. he color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 119 120 Choosing a Color Temperature When I Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The color temperature is displayed in the control panel CES onZ Yon WB button Sub command dial 2550 WB K Control panel Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white SHOOTING MENU balance menu Note that the color temperature with the T R o WB button and the sub command dial replaces the H value selected in the white balance menu w Auto distortion control OFF Color space Active D Lighting P HDR high dynamic range Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast The camera
206. he current series displayed 177 178 To Description View additional Press gt to view photographs in order recorded 4 to view photographs photographs in reverse order View photo Press A or W to view information about current photograph information CO 179 View thumbnails See page 185 for more information Saco Q QUAL See page 187 for more information a Confirmation dialog will be displayed Press r again to delete photo Change protect Yon WB To protect image or to remove protection from protected status image press on WB M 188 Return to HES Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken shooting mode ZN immediately Create retouched copy of current photograph M 261 If Ki E current picture is marked with icon to show that it is a movie pressing starts movie playback M 67 Delete images Retouch photo or play movie Choosing a Memory Card Slot If two memory cards are inserted you can select a card for playback by holding the BKT button and pressing A during full frame or thumbnail playback The dialog shown at right will be displayed highlight the desired slot and press to list the folders on the selected card then highlight a folder and press to view the pictures in the highlighted folder The same procedure canbe used when selecting pictures for operations in the playback BKT button M 207 and retouch M 261 menus or when copying white ba
207. he edit display Press i K to copy the photograph CF aA E OKE Before Color Sketch MENU button gt r retouch menu Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made Color sketch with colored pencils Press A or VW to highlight Vividness or P Outlines and press lt or gt to change Vividness can be Ore increased to make colors more saturated or decreased for a aa washed out monochromatic effect while outlines canbe made igi thicker or thinner Thicker outlines makes colors more saturated The results can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Perspective Control MENU button gt c4 retouch menu Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from Perspective control the base of a tall object Use the multi selector to adjust E perspective note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out The results can be previewed in the edit display Press K to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy E Cancel 3Zoom OK AY Before 275 Miniature Effect MENU button gt r retouch menu Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama Works best with photos taken from a high vantage point The area that will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame 276 To Press
208. he slide show is in progress To Description Press lt q to return to previous frame to skip to next Skip back skip ahead frame Change or hide photo info displayed still images only M 179 Pause or resume slide show Q QUAL Press 8 QUAL during movie playback to increase Qe ISO volume amp amp ISO to decrease Exit to playback menu MENU End slide show and return to playback menu Exit to playback mode gt End show and return to playback mode l Press shutter release button halfway to return to Exit to shooting mode y y 5 shooting mode The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu View additional photo info Pause resume Raise lower volume D gt Restart OK 2s Frame interval E Exit 213 The Shooting Menu Shooting Options To display the shooting menu press MENU and select the shooting menu tab SHOOTING MENU SHOOTING MENU Reset shooting menu Reset shooting menu Storage folder 100 5 Storage folder 100 File naming DSC File naming gt Role played by card in Slot2 O Role played by card in Slot 2 Image quality NORM 2 Image quality Image size E Image size Image area e Image area P JPEG compression iia JPEG compression MENU button The shooting menu contains the following options Option aa Option aa Reset shooting
209. highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press To delete the character at the current cursor position press the 1 r button Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long Any characters after the nineteenth will be deleted 7 Press amp QUAL Press the amp QUAL button to save changes and exit The new Picture Control will appear in the Picture Control list Manage Picture Control gt Rename Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu Manage Picture Control gt Delete The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed The Original Picture Control Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display Set Picture Control 5 FISD Standard ENL Neutral EVI Vivid EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait FALS Landscape Grid Adjust Q QUAL button Manage Picture Control a Save edit Rename Delete Load save Original Picture Control icon VIVID 02 a Sharpening Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue Qc E OKO Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with ViewNxX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory c
210. hotography a icon will flash and the time lapse recording indicator will be displayed in the control panel The time remaining in hours and minutes appears in the shutter speed display immediately before each frame is recorded At other times the time remaining can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer M 227 the standby timer will not expire during shooting To view current time lapse photography settings press the MENU Time lapse photography button between shots While time lapse photography is in progress aime the time lapse photography menu will show the interval and the time remaining These settings can not be changed while time lapse 200 Do AIS photography is in progress nor can pictures be played back or other Baii ana menu settings adjusted Move EE nterrupting Time Lapse Photography Time lapse photography will end automatically if the battery is exhausted The following will also end time lapse photography e Selecting Start gt Off in the Time lapse photography menu e Pressing the button between frames or immediately after a frame is recorded e Turning the camera off e Removing the lens e Connecting a USB or HDMI cable e Inserting amemory card into an empty slot e Pressing the shutter release button all the way down to take a photograph e Selecting remote m release mode e Selecting mode U1 or U2 or selecting
211. ialog gt q amp v A vy b lt a Print select 1 100ND600 100 1 100 2 100 3 100 4 100 5 100 6 ON me COPA OK 10 4 0 0 O Na Fo J amp QUAL button View highlighted photo full screen button View photos for selected date aa Select date 0 16 04 2012 KA o 18 04 2012 EA QLL OK 0 a Select date 15 04 2012 2 100ND600 A iS ey ey ey pe CE Back e OKA Select date DSC_0001 JPG 15 04 2012 10 02 28 4 Display printing options Setup Start printing 0K Page size Press 6 to display PictBridge printing options A Border fal Time stamp A 5 Adjust printing options Choose page size border and time stamp options as described on page 198 a warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small for an index print 6 Start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press 201 Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF 5 DPOF print order 1 Choose Select set for the DPOF print order item in the playback menu Press the MENU button and select DPOF print order in the playback menu Highlight Select set and press to remov
212. ibed in Step 2 on the previous page Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and Clean at startup shutdown 8 press gt 2 Select an option Clean image sensor Clean at startup shutdown Highlight an option and press ON Clean at startup FF Clean at shutdown S Clean at startup amp shutdown Cleaning off M Image Sensor Cleaning Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is charging Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low pass filter If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean the image sensor manually M 303 or consult a Nikon authorized service representative Y If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning a may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait 302 BE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu M 301 the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pa
213. icon and number of exposures remaining will be displayed some memory cards may in rare cases only display this information when the camera is on Control panel Step 3 Frame the Photograph 1 Ready the camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep your upper body stable When framing photographs in portrait tall orientation hold the camera as shown in the bottom of the three illustrations at right In mode shutter speeds slow when lighting is poor use of a tripod is recommended 2 Framethe photograph Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the main subject in the AF area brackets Using a Zoom Lens Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a larger area of the frame or zoom out to increase the area visible in the final photograph select longer focal lengths on the lens focal length scale to zoom in shorter focal lengths to zoom out AF area brackets Zoom in Zoom out 37 38 Step 4 Focus 1 Press the shutter release button halfway Press the shutter release button halfway to focus The active focus point will be displayed If the subject is poorly lit the flash may pop up and the AF assist illuminator may light
214. if level is too high adjust microphone sensitivity accordingly Left L and 4 Sound level 62 right R channel indicators appear when optional ME 1 or other stereo microphone is used 5 META nng The recording time available for movies 58 movie live view 6 Movie frame size The frame size for movie recording 65 D Monitor brightness indicator Guide A guide to the options available during movie live view 62 A monitor brightness indicator 62 Using an External Microphone The optional ME 1 stereo microphone can be used to record sound in stereo or to avoid recording lens noise caused by autofocus M 298 Headphones Third party headphones can be used Note that high sound levels may result in high volume particular care should be taken when headphones are used 61 BE Adjusting Settings in the Live View Display Microphone sensitivity headphone volume and monitor brightness can be adjusted as described below Note that microphone sensitivity and headphone volume can not be adjusted during recording and that brightness affects the monitor only 1 61 movies recorded with the camera are unaffected 1 Highlight a setting Press and hold gt WB and press lt or P to highlight the indicator for the desired setting Yon WB button a 2 Adjust the highlighted setting Keeping the gt n WB button pressed press A or VW to adjust the highlighted setting The Information Display Movi
215. igure the remote flash units Turn all the remote flash units on adjust group settings as desired and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the flash unit instruction manuals for details 8 Raise the built in flash Press the 4 button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted 9 Frame the photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for all other flash units are lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock 149 can be used if desired 239 The Flash Sync Mode Display does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the E4 button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A Ei icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The icon flashes when the built in flash is in mode M Commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light from the built in flash particular care is required if the camera is not mounted on a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong ref
216. ile the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects fast shutter speeds to freeze motion aa 6 ae Fast shutter speed 1 600 Slow shutter speed 6 s To choose a shutter speed rotate the main command dial while the exposure meters are on Shutter speed can be set to x Zan or to values between 30 s and 1 4000 S 77771 Main command dial See Also See page 323 for information on what to do if flashing kus a or indicator appears in the shutter speed displays A Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure Large apertures low f numbers increase flash range M 147 and reduce depth of field blurring objects behind and in front of the main subject Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field bringing out details in the background and foreground Short field depths are generally used in portraits to blur background details long field depths in landscape photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus Large aperture f 5 6 To choose an aperture between the minimum and maximum values for the lens rotate the sub command dial while the exposure meters are on Sub command dial Depth of Field Preview
217. ime while Far is flashing to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the control panel and viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings 31 32 The Write Protect Switch SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect D switch to prevent accidental loss of data When this switch A is in the lock position the memory card can not be formatted and photos can not be deleted or recorded a Write protect switch warning will be displayed in the monitor if you attempt to vLOCK release the shutter To unlock the memory card slide the switch to the write position See Also See page 250 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before framing pictures in the viewfinder 1 Turn the camera on Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter adjustment control until the AF area brackets are in sharp focus When operating the diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye wr cc an COTS ron so igol k
218. indoor background lighting Use for parties and other indoor scenes 28 Beach Snow z P eo 2a Ea a gt 2 see SS Sw Capture the brightness expanses of water snow or sand The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off Sunset a Dusk Dawn Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before dawn or after sunset The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor va Pet Portrait Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Use for portraits of active pets The AF assist illuminator turns off 43 44 Candlelight For photographs taken by candlelight The built in flash turns off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor amp P Blossom Re ty a St eee gt i a Sip A Use for fields of flowers orchards in bloom and other landscapes featuring expanses of blossoms The built in flash turns off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in autumn leaves The built in flash turns off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor t1 Food nl aan Use for vivid photographs of food Use of a t
219. ing is performed M 252 Computer displays NEF RAW images differently from camera Third party software does not display effects of Picture Controls Active D Lighting or vignette control Use ViewNX 2 supplied or optional Nikon software such as Capture NX 2 available separately Miscellaneous Date of recording is not correct Set camera clock M 27 253 Menu item can not be selected Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted Note that Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter M 255 321 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor Indicator Control View flashes minimum aperture highest f number pewter bate a battery e Battery exhausted e Recharge or replace battery e Battery can not be used e Contact Nikon authorized service representative ca An extremely exhausted Replace the battery or xxiii 21 flashes flashes rechargeable Li ion battery recharge the battery if the 23 or a third party battery is rechargeable Li ion battery inserted either in the camera is exhausted or in the optional MB D14 battery pack No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without Aperture value will be AF specifying maximum aperture displayed if maximum aperture 172 Apertu
220. ional page of GPS data 183 5 a omm P9 a EL E flashing The GP 1 is searching for a signal Pictures taken while RRS RTS the icon is flashing do not include GPS data EE ees ee ee No icon No new GPS data have been received from the GP 1 for at least two seconds Pictures taken when the GB icon is not displayed do not include GPS data 175 176 More on Playback Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the gt button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor 1 100ND600 DSC_0012 JPG _ NORMAL 15 04 2012 10 44 12 Fx 6016x4016 5 button Multi selector Sub command dial m button gt button MENU button Te E button Yon WB button ts Q QUAL button Q1 ISO button E i Main command dial Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu CO 212 Mi i 100ND600 DSC_0011 JPG _ NORMAL 15 04 2012 10 44 10 Fx E 6016x4016 Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu M 212 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting because the camera is already in the correct orientation images are not rotated automatically during image review In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in t
221. ions available for Times Output Options available for Times 2 10 15 20 25 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 EE Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting A 294 Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right Press lt Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode or gt to highlight the following options A or W to change 0 Built in flash Group Group B Channel Option Description Built in flash i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in EJ increments of 1 3 EV M Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire although remote flash units do The built in flash Choose a flash mode for the built in flash commander flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes GroupA Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in m increments of 1 3 EV Auto aperture available only with compatible flash units Q 294 Choose flash M compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 1 128 of full power The flash units in this group do not fire Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B
222. ised 85 3 Frame the photograph Cover the Viewfinder When taking photos without youreyeto DK 21 rubber eyecup DK 5 eyepiece cap the viewfinder remove the DK 21 rubber ra eyecup and insert the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap as shown This prevents light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure Hold the camera firmly when removing the rubber eyecup 4 Take the photograph Self timer mode Press the shutter release button halfway to focus and then press the button the rest of the way down to start the self timer note that the timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released The self timer lamp will start to flash Two seconds before the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop flashing The shutter will be released ten seconds after the timer starts Remote control mode From a distance of 5m 16 ft or less aim the transmitter on the ML L3 at either of the infrared receivers on the camera 2 4 and press the ML L3 shutter release button In delayed remote mode the self timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the shutter is released In quick response remote mode the self timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released In remote mirror up mode pressing the ML L3 shutter release button once raises the mirror the shutter will be released and the self timer lamp will flash after 30 s
223. ithout sound i 100ND600 DSC_00 15 04 2012 10 10 68 Editing Movies Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills Option I Choose start end point removed Description Create a copy from which the opening or closing footage has been Q Save selected frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still Trimming Movies To create trimmed copies of movies 1 Display a movie full frame Press the gt button to display pictures full frame in the monitor and press lt and P to scroll through pictures until the movie you wish to edit is displayed 2 Choose a starting or end point Play the movie back as described on page 67 pressing to start and resume playback and to pause and pressing lt or P or rotating the main or sub command dials to locate the desired frame M 67 Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar 3 Display movie edit options Press the 2 button to display movie edit options i 100ND600 DSC_00 15 04 2012 10 10 gt button Movie progress bar Edit movie N Choose start end point OK R Save selected frame Cancel E button 69 4 Select Choose start end point Highlight Choose start end point and press Edit movie NM Choose start end point OK amp Save selected frame E The dialog shown at right will be displayed j A lecting th t
224. itor Auto brightness Manual default Clean image Clean now sensor Clean at startup shutdown Lock mirrorup Start for cleaning Image Dust Off Start ref photo Clean sensor and then start HDMI Output resolution Device control Flicker reduction Auto default 50 Hz 60 Hz Time zone and Time zone date Date and time Date format Daylight saving time Language e tina Dansk Deutsch English Espanol EAAnvikd Fran ais Indonesia Italiano Magyar Nederlands Norsk Polski Portugu s BR Portugu s PT Pycckun Romana Suomi Svenska T rk e YKpalHcbKa st FASC i Fic SA AA StS nuntuna Reet Image comment Done Input comment Attach comment Auto image On rotation Off default Battery info Copyright Done information Artist Copyright Attach copyright information Save load Save settings settings Load settings GPS Standby timer Position Use GPS to set camera clock Virtual horizon Non CPU lens Done data Lens number Focal length mm Maximum aperture AF fine tune On Off Saved value Default List saved values Eye Fi upload 26 Slot 1 Slot 2 Firmware version AF fine tune 1 Not available at battery levels of Cza or below 2 Available only with compatible Eye Fi memory cards c RETOUCH MENU M 261 D Lighting Red eye correction Trim Monochrome Black and white Sepia Cyanotype Filter effects Skylight Warm filter Red intensifier Green intensifier Blue in
225. ity Normal E E T k B E 24 12 A me 1280x 720 60p T E 7 Bite 29 min 59 s A T 29 min 59 Listed value Actual frame rates for 60p 50p 30p 25p and 24p are 59 94 50 29 97 25 and 23 976 fps respectively e Microphone Turn the built in or optional ME 1 stereo microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity automatically Microphone off to turn sound recording off to select microphone sensitivity manually select Manual sensitivity and choose a sensitivity e Destination Choose the slot to which movies are recorded The RUMI F 5 Destination menu shows the time available on each card recording ends automatically when no time remains E Slot 1 01h 24m 04s 2 Slot 2 00h 00m 36s 65 66 1 Select Movie settings Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Movie settings in the shooting menu and press gt 2 Choose movie options Highlight the desired item and press then highlight an option and press 6 m Frame Size and Rate SHOOTING MENU Movie settings MUN o Movie settings 5 Frame size frame rate EE Movie quality HIGH Microphone DA Destination fi Frame size and rate affects the distribution and amount of noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or bright spots Viewing Movies Movies are indicated by a icon in full frame playback M 177 Press to start
226. ivity control NEF RAW recording Remote control mode Delayed remote Type compressed NEF RAW bit depth 14 bit White balance Auto gt Normal uto gain Interval timer shooting Time lapse photography Movie settings Frame sieffamerate 1920x1080 30p Movie quality High quality 0 640 Choose color temp 5000 K Set Picture Control Standard Auto distortion control Off Color space sRGB Active D Lighting P S A M lt 4 mi ie HDR mode Exposure differential Smoothing 1 Default settings restored with Reset shooting menu M 214 2 Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress 3 Start time reset to Now interval reset to 1 minute number of intervals and number of shots reset to 1 A and Start set to Off Shooting ends when reset is performed 4 Interval reset to 5 s recording time to 25 minutes 312 EE Custom Settings Menu Defaults Option aa a1 AF C a selection Release 221 a2 fous 221 a3 3 Normal 222 4 AF point illumination Auto 222 K Focus point wrap around No wrap 222 a6 Number of focus points 39 points 223 a7 Built in AF assist illuminator On 223 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 1 3 step 224 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 step 224 b3 Easy exposure compensation 225 b4 Center weighted area 12 mm 226 b5 Fine tune optimal exposure Matixmeteing J Center weighted metering 0 2 Spotmeteing oo d 26 QStandbytimer
227. kon Creative Lighting System CLS and can be used with CLS compatible flash units Optional flash units can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described below The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash units with a locking pin 1 Remove the accessory shoe cover 2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe See the manual provided with the flash unit for details The built in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached The AS 15 Sync Terminal Adapter When the AS 15 sync terminal adapter available separately is mounted on the camera accessory shoe flash accessories can be connected via a sync terminal M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon flash units Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography EE CLS Compatible Flash Units The camera can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units e The SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 Feature al SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 4007
228. l Y T D 9 E E E REAR Rear curtain sync v 1 Select mode P S A or M lower built in flash and use optional flash unit only 2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 3 Autofocus is available with AF S VR Micro Nikkor 105mm f 2 8G IF ED and AF S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f 2 8G ED lenses only 4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode Flash Control Mode The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe as follows Flash sync Auto FP A 234 a i TTL Fr TTL FP d ay Auto aperture AA AA AA Non TTL auto flash A A A FP ml a Distance priority manual GN h h a a U aD UO od Manual M Mo Repeating flash RPT 2m A Advanced wireless lighting CMD CMD 4 295 296 Notes on Optional Flash Units Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions If the flash unit supports CLS refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D600 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than the flash will fire with every shot even in modes in which the built in flash can not be used Note that optional flash units can not be used in movie live view CO
229. lance from an existing photograph M 125 Playback slot and folder Slot 2 Cancel See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay 228 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that image only shooting data RGB histograms highlights and overview data are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback display options M 209 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken g LATITUDE N 535 S F ae 43 696 fi 33M 15 04 2012 01 15 00 y lt WEP 0 0 sRGB ESD vy ERE ee T oak File information None image only Overview GPS data N ie A Kad Ty lt gt Ce DID Oy Jou ak aS Jou a OD 0 Ep yr i Highlights RGB histogram Shooting data EE File Information Protect Stats eeistececesccst eee 188 2 Retouch indicator ssssssesssssesssssessssssressssreess 261 Bi FOCUS point Y2 vecesssssssssssessssssesssssssecssssesassseees 101 AF area brackets lavi cssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseees 33 Frame number total number of frames BR mage quality caanererucrnaguiencntnnernrents 93 13 MAJE S Ze nsssssooessosseressooososssvoressesosessssorsesosrerssss 95 12 3 be A TOONDGOO DSC 0001
230. lash level white balance or Active D Lighting see page 153 113 114 White Balance P S A and M Modes Only White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source In modes other than P S A and M white balance is set automatically by the camera Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources in P S A and M modes but other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source Option Description AUTO Auto White balance is adjusted automatically For best 3 500 piece i results use type G or D lens If built in or optional Keep warm lighting colors AE flash fires results are adjusted for flash Incandescent 3 000 K Use under incandescent lighting om Fluorescent Use with e Sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues e Warm white fluorescent lights e White fluorescent lights e Cool white fluorescent lights e Daylight white fluorescent lights e Daylight fluorescent lights High color temperature light sources e g High temp mercury vapor 7 200 K mercury vapor lamps Direct sunlight 5 200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight 4 Flash 5 400 K Use with built in or optional flash Cloudy 6 000 K_ Use in daylight under overcast skies amp Shade 8 000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 2 500 Choose color temperature from list of values 4 Choose color temp 10 000K amp 120 Use subject light sour
231. layback menus and the information display Option Description When the monitor is on monitor brightness is automatically adjusted according to Auto ambient lighting conditions Care should be taken not to cover the ambient brightness sensor M 4 Press A or W to choose monitor brightness Choose higher values for increased Manual _ brightness lower values for reduced brightness See Also For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view see page 53 250 Image Dust Off Ref Photo MENU button gt setup menu Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 available separately for more information see the Capture NX 2 manual Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A non DX lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Choose a start option Image Dust Off ref photo Highlight one of the following options and press To exit without acquiring image dust off data press MENU Clean sensor and then start e Start The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will appear in the EEIE viewfinder and control panel displays featureless white object 10 cm from lens e Clean sensor and then start Select this option to Focus will be set to infinity clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will appear in
232. le to the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed 155 EE White Balance Bracketing The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph each with a different white balance For more information on white balance see page 115 1 Select white balance bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e6 Auto STE bracketing set WB WB bracketing 10K E ADL bracketing 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which they will be taken x a Number of shots i e BF 2 4 4 mci lt s Bracketing progress L indicator BKT button Main command dial Control panel BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder see right the Gi ETT control panel will show mama 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose from increments of 1 5 mired CQ 119 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired The B value indicates the amount of blue the A value the amount of amber M 117 _ White balance E lt a gt increment E BKT button Sub command dial Control panel The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below Control panel Bracketing progress indicator No ofshots Increment Bracketing order ee ewe TAT OA
233. le with 24 00000000000 135 mm AF lenses however autofocus is z available only with the focus points shown at right 0o00 oog ia 50 105mm O 24 135 mm In mode P the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of wo 20 o so woo 320 4 5 s m 0f v If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D600 e Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL15 21 23 Additional EN EL15 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon authorized service representatives e Battery Charger MH 25 M 21 Recharge EN EL15 batteries e Multi Power Battery Pack MB D14 The MB D14 is equipped with a shutter release button at AE AF lock button multi selector and main and sub command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall Power orientation When attaching the MB D14 remove the camera MB D14 contact sources cover e Power Connector EP 5B AC Adapter EH 5b These accessories can be used to power the camera for extended periods EH 5a and EH 5 AC adapters can also be used The EP 5B is required to connect the camera to the EH 5b see page 299 for details Note that when the camera is used with an MB D14 the EP 5B must b
234. lections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures high f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the remote flash units take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance e4 Exposure Comp for Flash MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used Option Description Both flash level and exposure compensation are adjusted to modify exposure over the entire frame 4 Background only Exposure compensation applies to background only Aata Entire frame 240 e5 Modeling Flash MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If On is selected when the camera is being used with the built in Modeling flash flash or an optional CLS compatible flash unit 1 294 a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth of field pr
235. licks into place If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M mode switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual override Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring M 287 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number Image Area The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached M 89 Image area 26 Basic Setup A language selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on Choose a language and set the time and date Photographs can not be taken until you have set the time and date 1 Turn the camera on A language selection dialog will be displayed 2 Selecta language Press A or W to highlight the desired language and press 6 3 Choose a time zone A time zone selection dialog will be displayed Press lt or P to highlight the local time zone the UTC field shows the difference between the selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press 4 Choose a date format Press A or W to choose the order in which the year month and day will be displayed Pr
236. luminated by a strobe or other bright momentary light source In addition distortion may occur if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through the frame Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps can be reduced using Flicker reduction M 252 although they may still be visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Exposure Depending on the scene exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live view is not used Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display producing photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor In P S A and M modes exposure can be adjusted by 5 EV 112 Note that the effects of values over 3 EV or under 3 EV can not be previewed in the monitor The Information Display Live View Photography To hide or display indicators in the monitor during live view photography press the Ri button Information on Information off TeS Taci 5 wee ai iS F5 z 1001 20k Virtual horizon Framing guides Q 258 Manual Focus To focus in manual focus mode M 103 rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is in focus To magnify the view in the m
237. ly M 287 For information on the focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding see page 287 8 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lt New gt or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus 9 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster 10 Some lenses can not be used see page 288 Camera setting NS S su Add ANN S UN S s o S SU A h AS LUIS 285 16 18 19 20 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 ED is mounted on camera If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data M 172 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data 172 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved For improved precision specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data 172 Can be used in manual mode M at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In mode A preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting le
238. m button to delete the current photograph 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback 2 Press the fi rma button A confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete Delete s Yes 2 Yes f Cancel Cancel i 100ND600 DSC D001 IPE gt 15 04 2012 10 02 28 2160164016 OE i ze t mm button Full frame playback Thumbnail playback Calendar playback thumbnail list 3 Press the fi mat button again To delete the photograph press the button To exit without deleting the photograph press the gt button T me button Calendar Playback During calendar playback you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the 1 r button QI 186 See Also The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted M 212 189 190 The Playback Menu The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options Note that depending on the number of images some time may be required for deletion goo OO Option Description Selected Delete selected pictures Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date 4 191 ALL All Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback QQ 207 If two cards are insert
239. mat film cameras while automatically cropping pictures to the DX angle of view when using DX format lenses See page 335 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored at different image area settings HE Auto DX Crop Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX Image area lens is attached 5 Option Description a Choose image area Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is On _ attached If another lens is attached the crop selected for Choose image area will be used Off Crop selected for Choose image area is used DX Lenses DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller angle of view than lenses for 35mm format cameras If Auto DX crop is off and FX 36x24 1 0x FX format is selected for Choose image area when a DX lens is attached the edges of the image may be eclipsed This may not be apparent in the viewfinder but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out 89 90 EE Choose Image Area Choose the image area used when a non DxX lens is attached or Image area a DxX lens is attached with Off selected for Auto DX crop tu 491 Auto DX crop Opti on Des cripti on Choose image area FX 36x24 Images are recorded in FX format using the full 1 0 area of the image sensor 35 9 x 24 0 mm Fe FX format producing an angle of view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a 35 mm format
240. mber A blue B axis M 117 to fine tune white balance when 4 or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 117 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired M 119 Press the n WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 an asterisk X appears in the control panel oe Yon WB button Sub command dial TE A Control panel White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue Color Temperature Fine Tuning White balance When Choose color temp is selected you can view the ere color temperature while fine tuning white balance we Al uD EZOKON Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of t
241. mber of shots press A or W to change Press to continue 5 Start shooting Highlight On and press to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval timer highlight Off and press 68 The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time or after about 3 s if Now was Interval timer shooting Al Select no of timesxno of shots lt QOHxA 000 Or DA T5 003 x 2 0006 u VV VI I5 003 x2 7006 Number of Number Total intervals of shots numberof interval shots Interval timer shooting 10 05 ue 01 00 03 x2 0006 09 30 Move gt E selected for Choose start time in Step 2 Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken Note that because the shutter speed frame rate and time needed to record images may vary from one interval to the next the time between the end of one interval and the beginning of the next may vary If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of hurt amp is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor Out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting M 167 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card Cover the Viewfinder To prevent light entering via the vi
242. mbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert anew memory card 230 d8 Information Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Auto AUTO is selected the color of the lettering in the information display 4 9 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color om r mAH wim SON OF ON ae DO OM 2 Aa 0 Dark on light Light on dark d9 LCD Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Off is selected the control panel backlight LCD illuminator 49 LCD illumination will only light while the power switch is rotated toward 8 If On is selected the control panel will be illuminated whenever the standby timer is active M 39 Select Off for increased battery life d10 Exposure Delay Mode MENU button gt Custom Settings menu In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur didExposure delay mode pictures select 1 s 2 s or 3 s to delay shutter release until one tw
243. med for about 6 seconds reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c2 Standby timer Q 227 E7777 EZZ e Exposure meters on Exposure meters off The Built in Flash If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in mode the built in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway If the flash is raised photographs can only be taken when the flash ready indicator is displayed If the flash ready indicator is not displayed the flash is charging remove your finger briefly from the shutter release button and try again To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place 39 Creative Photography Scene Modes The camera offers a choice of scene modes Choosing a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene making creative photography as simple as selecting a mode framing a picture O sceNe and shooting as described on pages 35 39 BE SCENE Mode To view the currently selected scene rotate the mode dial to SCENE and press the Hi button To choose another scene rotate the main command dial Mode dial wa SON HA ON 0A DPU OF 2s Me o Night Night portrait landscape Autumn colors
244. mer photography the icon inthe control panel ma will flash Immediately before the next shooting interval begins the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the standby timer expires To view current interval timer settings select Interval timer Interval timer shooting shooting between shots While interval timer photography is in progress the interval timer menu will show the starting time the shooting interval and the number of intervals and shots remaining None of these items can be changed while interval timer Soe 68 30 photography is in progress Move Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval EE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval timer photography can be paused by e Pressing the button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off e
245. metering Spot metering Framing grid Choose image area Viewfinder virtual horizon MY MENU Access top item in MY MENU 1 step spd aperture Choose non CPU lens number Playback None Vii f Controls f4 f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 Assign AE L AF L button Customize command dials Release button to use dial Slot empty release lock Reverse indicators Assign MB D14 button g Movie g1 Assign Fn button g2 Assign viii preview button AE AF lock default AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON FV lock None Reverse rotation Change main sub Aperture setting Menus and playback Yes No default Release locked Enable release default Tahini at default AE AF lock default AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON FV lock Same as Fn button Index marking View photo shooting info AE AF lock AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON None default Index marking default View photo shooting info AE AF lock AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON None g Movie g3 Assign AE L Index marking AF L button View photo shooting info AE AF lock default AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON None g4 Assign Take photos default shutter Record movies button q SETUP MENU M 249 Format memory Slot 1 card Slot 2 Save user Save to U1 settings Save to U2 Reset user Reset U1 settings Reset U2 Mon
246. mirror up 1 5 fps CL or 5 5 fps CH 25 55 105s 20 s 1 9 exposures at intervals of 0 5 1 2 or 3s Delayed remote quick response remote remote mirror up TTL exposure metering using 2 016 pixel RGB sensor e Matrix 3D color matrix metering Il type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data e Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 12 mm circle in center of frame Diameter of circle can be changed to 8 15 or 20 mm or weighting can be based on average of entire frame non CPU lenses use 12 mm circle or average of entire frame e Spot Meters 4 mm circle about 1 5 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used e Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV Y e Spot metering 2 20 EV aad 327 328 Exposure Exposure meter coupling Mode Exposure compensation Exposure bracketing Flash bracketing White balance bracketing ADL bracketing Exposure lock ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index Active D Lighting Focus Autofocus Detection range Lens servo Focus point AF area mode Focus lock Flash Built in flash Guide Number Flash control Combined CPU and Al AUTO Auto auto auto flash off scene portrait all landscape amp child X sports W close up Pi night portrait E night landscape X party indoor 38 beach snow s
247. mm f 11 ED serial numbers 200111 200310 174031 174127 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 24 mm 16 mm in DX format to 300 mm although in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to shadows cast by the lens while lenses that block the subject s view of the red eye reduction lamp may interfere with red eye reduction Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below Lens Minimum distance without vignetting AF S DX NIKKOR 10 24mm f 3 5 4 5G ED 18 24 mm No vignetting 1 1 ft 3in x AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 12 24mm f 4G IF ED me L 20 24mm 24mm No vignetting Lens Minimum distance without vignetting AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 17 55mm f 2 8G IF ED 2 0 m 6 ft 7in 24 55mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX NIKKOR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR II 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX VR Zoom Nikkor 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED 24 200 mm No vignetting AF S DX NIKKOR 18 300mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR a me ate 50 300 mm No vignetting AF S NIKKOR 16 35mm f 4G ED VR 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S Zoom Nikkor 17 35mm f 2 8D IF ED e t me it H m 35 mm No vignetting AF Zoom Nikkor 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D I
248. n Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash 0 EV compensation to 0 0 Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Optional Flash Units Flash compensation is also available with optional SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units The SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 also allow flash compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit the value selected with the flash unit is added to the value selected with the camera See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl A 224 For information on choosing how flash and exposure compensation combine see Custom Setting e4 Exposure comp for flash N 240 For information on automatically varying flash level over a series of shots see page 153 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button Zhao ati Select FV lock for Custom Setting f2 Assign Fn button RA 242 a AE lock only Ma AE lock Hold a AF lock only AF ONW AN Flash off 2 Raise
249. n gt shooting menu If On is selected photographs taken at shutter speeds slower aidie aly than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise bright spots wa AAAA AS 7 7 a randomly spaced bright pixels or fog The time required for g aK processing roughly doubles during processing tab nr will flash in the shutter speed aperture displays and pictures can not be taken if the camera is turned off before processing is complete the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Long exposure noise reduction is not available during movie recording High ISO NR MENU button gt shooting menu Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description High Reduce noise randomly spaced bright pixels lines or fog particularly in Normal photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities Choose the amount of noise reduction Low performed from High Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 2500 and higher The Off amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR 218 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings To display the Custom Settings menu press MENU and select the Custom Settings menu tab
250. n formatted for use in y 29 31 flashes new memory card Format the card camera Clock has been reset is Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 27 253 Failed to update flash unit firmware Flash cannot be Firmware for flash unit Contea onea used mounted on camera was service representative Contact a Nikon not updated correctly authorized service representative Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming live 64 view or movie recording Unable to start live The internal temperature view Please wait of the camera is high Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem RA Select folder containing images from Playback folder menu or insert memory card containing images No images can be played back until another folder has been selected or Hide image 208 used to allow at least one image to be displayed No images on memory card or in folder s Folder contains no 29 207 images selected for playback All images are hidden All photos in current folder are hidden File has been created or modified using a computer or different make of camera or file is corrupt Cannot display this file File can not be played back on camera Images created with other Cannot select this Selected image can not AeVceecancnenbEe 262 file be retouched retouched e Movies created with other devices can not be edited e Movies must be at least 71 two secon
251. n the image was created 279 280 fa My Menu Z Recent Settings To display My Menu press MENU and select the My Menu tab MY MENU Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording gt Assign Fn button Rank items P Choose tab MENU button nS MY MENU Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording f2 Assign Fn button Add items Remove items Rank items Choose tab The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access up to 20 items If desired recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu QU 283 Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below EE Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items In My Menu 3 highlight Add items and press gt 2 Select a menu Highlight the name of the menu containing the option you wish to add and press P 3 Select an item Highlight the desired menu item and press QW 4 Position the new item Press A or V to move the new item up or down in My Menu Press 68 to add the new item MY MENU Image quality JPEG compression NEF RAW recording 2 Assign Fn button Add items Remove items Rank items Choose tab Add items Playback menu Shooting menu Custom setting menu Setup menu Retouch menu Add items Shooting menu N Reset shooting menu Storage folder
252. national documents stipulated by law is prohibited copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual M 121 Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices AVC Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO i ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD AVC VIDEO AND OR ii DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OT
253. nced Wireless Lighting Flash mode feature SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SB 700 SU 800 600 SB R200 HTL ETT balanced fash tordis V7 VW V7 ww v AA beget A Mnao ww a O eN pime poyma 7 wf Ea M a RPT Repeating Ww Auto FP High Speed Sync ViVi v vvi v vv FV odi AF assist for multi area AF KAII Flash Color Information Communication Sel REAR Red eyereduion v v vv v v O Power zoom Viv iv v v ii 1 Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit 6 Can be selected with camera 7 Select 1 250 s Auto FP or 1 200 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 234 8 CPU lens required X SIS S Auto Aperture Non TTL Auto Unless the focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the Non CPU lens data 7 4 option in the setup menu choosing auto aperture AA when a non CPU lens is attached automatically selects non TTL auto A 294 HE Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes Flash unit SB 80DX SB 28DX SB 28 SB 30 SB 27 2 SB 225S SB 23 SB 293 Non TTL auto 2 E a Manua
254. ng any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately ATTENTION Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada This symbol on the battery indicates that the battery is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e All batteries whether marked with this symbol or not are designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste e For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management Notices for Customers in the U S A Power Cable At voltages over AC 125 V U S A only The power cable must be rated for the voltage in use be at least AWG no 18 gauge and have SVG insulation or better with a NEMA 6P 15 plug rated for AC 250 V 15 A Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that i
255. normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are recommended The Shooting Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity SHOOTING MENU i D settings option in the shooting menu M 214 ye High ISO NR NORM ISO sensitivity settings ae Remote control mode 2s Multiple exposure OFF Interval timer shooting OFF Time lapse photography OFF See Also For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size see Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value N 224 For information on displaying ISO sensitivity in the control panel or adjusting ISO sensitivity without using the amp amp ISO button see Custom Setting d3 ISO display and adjustment M 229 For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 218 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control P S A and M Modes Only If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user ISO sensitivity is adjusted appropriately when the flash is used 1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control for IN SHOOTING MEN ISO sensitivity settings in the shooting Lona posure NR menu TE sensitivity settings i To display the menus press the MENU button on z alee w Select ISO sensitivity settings
256. ns In mode M preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation Use preset aperture In mode A set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph e PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera Holder e Noise in the form of horizontal lines may appear in movies taken with the following lenses at ISO sensitivities of 6400 or higher use manual focus or focus lock 286 AF S Zoom Nikkor 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5G IF AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 18 70mm f 3 5 4 5G IF ED Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses CPU lenses particularly types G and D are recommended but note that IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring lt j j CPU contacts Aperture ring D n i UT A H CPUlens Type G lens The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF I teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF I lenses AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VR II e AF S 300mm f 4D ED AF
257. nterference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet ona circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D600 CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 xxi xxii Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in p
258. ntienteaciasencaicnniuane 115 156 WB bracketing Auto bracketing GEL i eosisatarteinraaestenndaateriaen 156 241 White balance eee 115 156 Wide area AF csssessesssssseeeseesees 52 Wireless mobile adapter 298 341 No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION NIKON CORPORATION AMA14687 Printed in Europe S B2G01 11 2012 Nikon Corporation 6MB15311 01
259. ntly 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame AF Area Mode AF area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder AF area mode Control panel Viewfinder AF area mode Control panel Viewfinder Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a3 Focus tracking with lock on M 222 See page 52 for information on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording Focus Point Selection The camera offers a choice of 39 focus points that can be used to compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point in the viewfinder while the exposure meters are on Press to select the center focus point The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pr
260. ntrl 224 EXI Teea 217 333 EXPOSULE cscesesseeeeeeeees 74 109 113 Exposure bracketing 153 241 Exposure comp for flash 240 Exposure compensation 112 Exposure delay mode 00 231 Exposure differential 140 Exposure INGICAtOTS ccceceseeseees 78 Exposure lOCK cssssecsssesseescsseees 110 Exposure METELS sccceceeees 39 227 Exposure progra M es 315 External microphone 61 65 Eye Fi upload ssssessssesesssssesssseessee 260 F Face priority AF sssseessesssesssessesseee 52 File NaAMINg sssseessseesssseessssssesssersse 216 File number sequence 0 230 Filter effects 132 133 267 Fine tune optimal exposure 226 Fine tuning white balance 117 Firmware VEFSION cecssssseseeeeeeees 260 FISIOV C eorne E 274 Flash 39 143 144 148 149 292 Flash White balance 0 115 Flash bracketing sss0 153 241 Flash cntrl for built in flash 236 Flash compensatioN 00 148 Flash MOde cssssessesseseesees 144 145 Flash only Auto bracketing set 153 241 Flash range sssesssecsesscsecsssecseeecees 147 Flash ready indicator 39 149 296 Flash shutter speed 146 235 Flash sync speed 234 235 327 Flash warning essssesssssesesseeseeseees 231 Flexible program ssssssssssessseeeees 75 Flicker reduction csesseseeeseeees 252 Fluo
261. ntrol panel in place of the number of exposures remaining Device Control See the television manual for details 205 206 Menu Guide gt The Playback Menu Managing Images To display the playback menu press MENU and select the gt playback menu tab PLAYBACK MENU PLAYBACK MENU Fr a Playback folder Playback folder Hide image IN Hide image gt Playback display options Playback display options MELO Copy image s Image review FP Image review After delete N After delete P Rotate tall Rotate tall MENU button The playback menu contains the following options Option RA Option AA Delete 190 Image review 212 Playback folder 207 After delete 212 Hide image 208 Rotate tall 212 Playback display options 209 Slide show 213 Copy image s 209 DPOF print order 202 See Also Menu defaults are listed on page 312 Playback Folder MENU button gt playback menu Choose a folder for playback I 177 Option Description ND600 Pictures in all folders created with the D600 will be visible during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Current Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback 207 208 Hide Image MENU button gt playback menu Hide or reveal pictures Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Option Description Select se
262. number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 335 Self Timer and Remote Control Modes The self timer and optional ML L3 remote control M 298 can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits Mount the camera ona tripod Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable level surface 2 Select a release mode Press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to self timer Or remote control mode In remote control mode the timing of the ae 3 SHOOTING MENU Vignette control ON shutter release can be selected using the Long exposure NR OFF r High ISO NR NORM Remote control mode option in the 7 t ISO sensitivity settings EE shooting menu After pressing the MENU E EEE H H Interval timer shooting OFF button to display the menus highlight D Taeniasis Remote control mode in the shooting MENU button menu and press gt to display the following options Press the selector up or down to highlight an option and press Option Description Shutter is released 2 s after ML L3 shutter release button is 2s Delayed remote pressed 5 Quick response Shutter is released when ML L3 shutter release button is remote pressed Press ML L3 shutter release button once to raise mirror again to Remote Mu release shutter and take photograph Prevents blur caused by mirror up camera moving when mirror is ra
263. o or three seconds after the mirror is raised d11 Flash Warning MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If On is selected the flash ready indicator 4 will flash in the viewfinder if the flash is required to ensure optimal exposure 231 d12 MB D14 Battery Type MENU button gt Custom Settings menu To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the optional MB D14 battery pack is used with AA batteries match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There is no need to adjust this option when using EN EL15 batteries Option Description LRG LR6 AA alkaline Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries GNiMH HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR6 Ni MH AA batteries QFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries Using AA Batteries The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline batteries have less capacity than some other types and should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Control panel Description _ Batteries fully charged a m Lowbattery Ready fresh batteries qa C
264. o a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card Do not expose to water heat high levels of humidity or direct sunlight Do not format memory cards in a computer Format the Memory Card Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being used or formatted in other devices m Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding M 193 1 Turn the camera on 2 Press the tt rim and 5 rm buttons Hold the i rim and 5 im buttons down simultaneously until a flashing F a r format appears in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder If two memory cards are inserted the card in Slot 1 M 30 will be selected you can choose the card in Slot 2 by rotating the main command dial To exit without formatting the memory card wait until F ar stops flashing about six seconds or press any button other than the T i and Ses rim buttons 3 Press the rim and SS xt buttons again Press the 1 rhm and amp 3 rm buttons together a second t
265. of shots 58 0 Battery age 0 0 4 TLL w 255 Copyright Information MENU button gt setup menu Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display M 182 and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately Q 298 e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Artist Enter a photographer name as described on page 135 Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long e Copyright Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 135 Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long e Attach copyright information Select this option to attach Copyright information copyright information to all subsequent photographs Done Attach copyright information can be turned on and off by Copyright highlighting it and pressing gt NIKON M Attach copyright information V Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option 256 Save Load Settings MENU button gt setup menu Select Save settings to save
266. ol Select Choose image area for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu M 219 Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f2 Assign Fn button M 242 or the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f3 Assign preview button 1 244 2 Use the selected control to choose an image area The image area can be selected by pressing the n selected button and rotating the main or sub ZA command dial until the desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder A 90 P CA A Fn button Main command dial The option currently selected for image area can be viewed by pressing the button to display the image area in the control panel viewfinder or information display FX format is displayed as 36 24 and DX format as 24 16 Auto DX Crop The selected control can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area M 95 Image Quality and Size Together image quality and size determine how much space each photograph occupies on the memory card Larger higher quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require more memory meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the memory card M 335 Image Quality Choose a file format and compression ratio image quality Option File type File type Description Raw data from the image sensor are
267. on when framing e Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during focusing Eyepiece adapter required available separately e Eyepiece Adapter DK 22 The DK 22 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier e Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 6 The DR 6 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to the lens for example from directly above when the camera is horizontal Filters Viewfinder eyepiece accessories 297 298 Software Body cap Remote controls Accessory terminal accessories Microphones Wireless mobile adapters e Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package with such advanced editing features as selection control points and an auto retouch brush e Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer to record movies and photographs and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software see the websites listed on page xxiii for the latest information on supported operating systems At default settings Nikon Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to an account on the computer and the computer is connected to the Internet A message is automatically displayed when an update is found Body Cap BF 1B Body Cap BF 1A The body cap k
268. onds while the standby timer is active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward again The Camera Body Continued KJ HDMI USB connector cover 194 196 204 11 Cover for accessory terminal csssscsesseeseees 298 BPR Lens release HU COM sais ccisssdsteonsicscsvaesissnsopaeinan 26 BEY AF mode Dutton ccsssssssseesensseseeeen 51 98 100 FOCUS MOE selector ssessssseesssseessseesssseees 97 103 15 Headphone connector sssssecesseseesscssseeseseeseees 61 g Connector for external microphone 61 iy USB connector CONNECTING to a COMPUTEL uu eeeseceeseeeeseees 194 CONNECTING to a PFINTEL uu eecessececsseeeeseees 196 KEJ HDMI mini pin COMME CTOF ssssssseesesesssseeesen 204 BE Accessory terminal ssssssssssessssssseeesee 175 298 Power switch AF assist illuminator sss sssssssesssssoeessssssssssseessss 223 Self tiMer LAMP essseccsssssesessscessscsssscessnesseeseees 86 Red eye reduction lamp sssssssssssesssssseessssessssssee 145 BR Sub command dial ccsssssssssssussssseeesen 12 245 JEJ Depth of field preview button 60 77 244 248 Fn function button s 92 149 174 242 JE Battery chamber cover ssssssssssussessssessnsssesseese 23 i Battery chamber cover latch cssssseeseeseeeees 23 I The Microphone and Speaker Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic devi
269. onitor up to about 19 x for precise focus press the amp QUAL button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor available only if wide or normal area AF is selected for AF area mode or press QE ISO to zoom out Navigation window 55 56 Non CPU Lenses When using non CPU lenses be sure to enter the focal length and maximum aperture using the Non CPU lens data option in the setup menu 1 172 Non CPU lenses can be used only in A and M modes M 73 aperture can be adjusted using the lens aperture ring The Count Down Display A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically M 53 the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect the internal circuits or if an option other than No limit is selected for Custom Setting c4d Monitor off delay gt Live view N 228 5 s before the monitor is due to turn off automatically Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected Note that although the count down does not appear during playback live view will still end automatically when the timer expires HDMI If the camera is attached to an HDMI video device during live view photography the camera monitor will remain on and the video device will display the view
270. ontrol timing of click made by mirror which is also quieter than in single frame mode In addition beep does not sound regardless of setting selected for Custom Setting d1 Beep A 228 Self timer Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake M 85 Remote control Shutter is controlled using shutter release button on optional ML L3 remote control 1 85 Mirror up Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto or close up photography or in other situations in which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs 1 Average frame rate with an EN EL15 battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 200 s or faster remaining settings other than Custom Setting d5 at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 2 Average frame rate with an EN EL15 battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 200 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer Frame rate drops at slow shutter speeds or very small apertures high f numbers when vibration reduction available with VR lenses or auto ISO sensitivity control is on M 105 107 or when the battery is low 83 84 The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 ph
271. ooting Use of a tripod is recommended Depending on the scene shadows may appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of smoothing Interval Timer Photography If On series is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting begins the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the selected interval if On single photo is selected interval timer shooting will end after a single shot 141 142 Flash Photography Using the Built in Flash The built in flash has a Guide Number GN 12 39 m ft ISO 100 20 C 68 F and provides coverage for the angle of view of 24 mm lens or a 16 mm lens in DX format It can be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to add a catch light to the subject s eyes BE Using the Built in Flash a Di X3 and Modes 1 Choose a flash mode m 144 2 Take pictures The flash will pop up as required when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and fire when a photograph is taken fthe flash does not pop up automatically DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand Failure to observe this precaution could damage the flash EE Using the Built in Flash P A M and t1 Modes 1 Raise the flash Press the button to raise the flash 2 Choose a flash mode P S A and M modes only 144 3 Take pictures The flash will
272. option in the SHOOTING MENU shooting menu M 214 Reset shooting menu Storage folder 100 File naming DSC Role played by card in Slot2 OO Image quality NORM Image size m Image area JPEG compression His ma Nn Hi J 95 96 Using Two Memory Cards When two memory cards are inserted in the camera you can use the Role played by card in Slot 2 item in the shooting menu to choose the role played by the card in Slot 2 Choose from Overflow the card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1 is full Backup each picture is recorded twice once to the card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2 and RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 as for Backup except that the NEF RAW copies of photos recorded at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are recorded only to the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2 Backup and RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of memory Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full Recording Movies When two memory cards are inserted in the camera the slot used to record movies can be selected using the Movie settings gt Destination option in the shooting menu M 65 Focus This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in the viewfinder Focus can be adjusted automatically see below or manually 40 103 The user can also select the focus point for
273. or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera 1 100ND600 DSC_0013 NDF 15 04 2012 10 01 30 Flicker Reduction MENU button gt setup menu Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury vapor lighting during live view or movie recording Choose Auto to allow the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency or manually match the frequency to that of the local AC power supply 252 Flicker Reduction If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture higher f number Time Zone and Date MENU button gt 9 setup menu Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off 27 Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone Set the camera clock If the clock is not set a flashing icon will appear in the information display Date format Choose the order in which the day month and year are displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will au
274. or when the button is pressed a second time Note that the remote control can not be used to record movies even if Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 Assign shutter button M 248 pressing the shutter release button on the remote control will release the shutter and record a photograph To cancel shooting select another release mode 86 M Before Using the Remote Control Before using the remote control for the first time remove the clear plastic battery insulator sheet Using the Built in Flash Before taking a photograph with the flash in P S A M or t1 modes press the E4 button to raise the flash and wait for the indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder 1 143 Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised while remote control mode is in effect or after the self timer has started If the flash is required the camera will only respond to the ML L3 shutter release button once the flash has charged In auto or scene modes in which the flash pops up automatically the flash will begin charging when remote control mode is selected once the flash is charged it will automatically pop up and fire when required Note that only one photograph will be taken when the flash fires regardless of the number of exposures selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer M 227 In flash modes that support red eye reduction the red eye reduction lamp will light for about one second before the shutter is released In
275. ording es Take photos and take a photograph with an aspect ratio of 16 9 for information on image size see page 63 Press the shutter release button halfway to start movie live view You can then press the shutter release button halfway to focus autofocus mode only and press it all the way down to start or end recording To end movie live view press the iy button The shutter release button on an optional remote cord M 298 can be used to start movie live view and to WR Record movies start and end movie recording the optional ML L3 remote control however can not be used to record movies In remote control mode pressing the shutter release button halfway does not start movie live view while pressing the shutter release button on the remote control releases the shutter to record a photograph and does not start or end movie recording Record Movies When this option is selected interval timer Q 164 is not available and the shutter release button can not be used during movie live view to record photographs measure preset white balance or record image dust off reference data Select Take photos to use these options 248 The Setup Menu Camera Setup To display the setup menu press MENU and select the setup menu tab 20L Format ED Format memory card eT E T Save user settings a gt Save user settings a Reset user settings zE Reset user settings gt Monitor b
276. ortion control OFF E Color space sRGB Active D Lighting OFF HDR high dynamic range OFF Active D Lighting EAA Auto EA H Extra high EAH High EAN Normal a GAL Low Active D Lighting can not be used with movies Noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines may appear in photographs taken with Active D Lighting Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects Active D Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 or above See Also When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing set Q 241 the camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of shots M 158 For information on using the Fn button and main command dial to select an Active D Lighting option see page 242 High Dynamic Range HDR Used with high contrast subjects High Dynamic Range HDR preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures HDR is most effective when used with matrix metering M 109 with other metering methods and a non CPU lens an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent to about 2 EV It can not be used to record NEF RAW images Movie recording 1 57 flash lighting bracketing M 153 multiple exposure M 160 and time lapse photography M 168 can not be used while HDR is in effect and a shutter speed of kine amp kv iS NOt available First exposure darker Second exposure brighter 1 Select HDR high dynamic range Press the ME
277. ose tab Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu To remove an item from the recent settings menu highlight it and press the i button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press again to delete the selected item 283 284 Technical Notes Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories cleaning and storing the camera and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera Compatible Lenses mode Nace SM 30 ar Lens accessory rangefinder 3D Color J Type G or D AF NIKKOR RRAN se ee le PCENIKKORseres SSCS pemos J e t efe 7 AFS AFITeleconverte v v vv vv ie Other AF NIKKOR exceptlensesforF3AF V v Ww vie rn oee CACC 4 Al Al modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E Vv vi lenses ena tv tat ca e Reno oo e E e a enoo o e e e MiypeTeeconeen e v v e e e PB 6 Bellows Focusing Attachment v v vy Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 or 13 je we sae V PN 11 1 IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used 2 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses 3 Spot metering meters selected focus point 1 109 4 The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting 6 Manual shooting mode only 7 Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses on
278. ossession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law e Items prohibited by law from being copied or e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions reproduced The government has issued cautions on Do not copy or reproduce paper money copies or reproductions of securities issued coins securities government bonds or by private companies shares bills checks local government bonds even if such gift certificates etc commuter passes or copies or reproductions are stamped coupon tickets except when a minimum of Sample necessary copies are to be provided for business use by acompany Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and Unless the prior permission of the tickets such as passes and meal coupons government has been obtained the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps The copying or reproduction of stamps drawings movies and photographs is issued by the government and of certified governed by national and inter
279. oting time or remote release mode is selected When complete time lapse movies are recorded to the memory card selected for Movie settings gt Destination M 65 169 170 m Time Lapse Photography Time lapse is not available in live view 49 57 at a shutter speed of tin amp z M 79 when bracketing M 153 High Dynamic Range HDR M 139 multiple exposure 21 160 or interval timer photography 164 is active Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take one shot at each interval The self timer can not be used Time lapse photography is not available in remote m release mode Calculating the Length of the Final Movie The total number of frames in the final movie can be approximated Length recorded by dividing the shooting time by the interval and rounding up The maximum length length of the final movie can then be calculated by diving the number of shots by the frame rate selected for Movie settings gt Frame size frame rate A 48 frame movie recorded at 1920 x 1080 24p for example will be about two seconds long The maximum length for movies recorded using time lapse photography is 20 minutes Cover the Viewfinder Memory card To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with indicator l exposure remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with p size the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap M 86 rame rate During Shooting During time lapse p
280. oto info to highlight an option then press gt to select the Additional photo info option for the photo information display AY chit appears next to selected items to deselect A highlight and press To return to the playback TEETE menu highlight Done and press 6 Copy Image s MENU button gt gt playback menu Copy pictures from one memory card to another This option is only available when two memory cards are inserted in the camera Option Description Select source Choose card from which pictures will be copied Select image s Select pictures to be copied Select destination folder Select destination folder on remaining card Copy image s Copy selected pictures to specified destination 1 Choose Select source oY image s Highlight Select source and press gt Select source Select image s 2 Select the source card ps or maset Highlight the slot for the card containing the images to be copied and press i Sot a 2 Slot 2 209 210 Choose Select image s i Highlight Select image s and press gt Select the source folder Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press gt Make the initial selection E Before going on to select or deselect individual images you can mark all or all protected images in the folder for copying by choosing Select all images or Select protected images To mark only individually selected images for copying choose Deselect all b
281. otographs can be taken in succession note however that the frame rate will drop when the buffer is full 00 The approximate number of images that can be stored in the buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed The illustration at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 28 pictures While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card Live View If a continuous release mode is used during live view photography M 49 or in movie live view CQ 57 photographs will be displayed in place of the view through the lens while the shutter release button is pressed See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d6 Max continuous release M 230 For information on the
282. otographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant applications and printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support DCF select the appropriate color space manually For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNxX 2 supplied and Capture NX 2 available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with this camera 217 Vignette Control MENU button gt shooting menu Vignetting is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses DX and PC lenses excluded Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture Choose from High Normal Low and Off Vignette Control Depending on the scene shooting conditions and type of lens JPEG images may exhibit noise fog or variations in peripheral brightness while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect Take test shots and view the results in the monitor Vignette control does not apply to movies M 57 multiple exposures M 160 or DX format images M 89 Long Exposure NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction MENU butto
283. paaaonta ela aeaai 149 Other Shooting Options 151 Two Button Reset Restoring Default SettingS esesesessssssssessesessesssssesseeseseees 151 BBG ELV WO tas Suse sastciae soca von E EA E N TO OO 153 M ltiple EXD OSUTE sennie N 160 interval Timer PHOCOGra PNY sascasscsssinannccnneuaenumsacemeedamnnemaens 164 Time Lapse Photography c ssssssssesscscsssessssssesscscssseccsssessesssesecscsssesecsessseceaesesecsesssecees 168 Nom CPU LENSES uunaia n EEVA OOE 172 The GP GPS URA eraann necro 175 xiii XIV More on Playback F ll Frame Playback senisesse Photo Informati Nssssewsronseseinaai ani Thumbnail Playback esmis nsnsi ne S Calendar Playback ccssssssssssssssssssssssssessssssssessssssessssssssessssssessssssssessseseeseaees Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM ssesssesssesssessseesseesseesseessesssesssesssee Protecting Photographs from Deletion s sssesssessseesseesseesseesseessecsseersseess Deleting Photographs sissiscssssascscsasisvasaversianniessavannceesiatdcsmnarareravessamaterenionienauanee Full Frame Thumbnail and Calendar Playback The Playback Menu sssesssesssseesseesssessseessseesseesssessseeosseeosseesseeonseesssrosseesseess Connections Connecting to a Computer sessesessessessessesesseseesessessesssseoseseosessessesssseosessesesses Before Connecting the CaMera sesesssssesssseesssseesssseessserosseeossseesssseeossee Connecting the CAMEL A c sssscsssssescs
284. phs are automatically displayed in the monitor for a few seconds after shooting See Also See page 178 for information on choosing a memory card slot Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the T t button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described on the preceding page The location of the current image is shown by an icon at the bottom left corner of the display 2 Delete the photograph Press the t button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press the 1 rhm button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press gt Delete To delete selected images 1 190 all images taken on a selected date M 191 or all images in a chosen location on a selected memory card M 190 use the Delete option in the playback menu T FORMAT button Delete Cancel pan N i 100ND600 DSC_0001 JPG _ NORMAL 15 04 2012 10 02 28 Fx 6016x4016 47 48 Live View Photography Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view 1 Rotate the live view selector to live view photography Cover the Viewfinder To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure remove the rubber eyecup and cover the Live view selector viewfinder with
285. pies of selected photographs 1 Select Resize RETOUCH MENU To resize selected images press MENU to display Quick retouch the menus and select Resize in the retouch gt i ton menu Color outline Color sketch Perspective control 2 Choose a destination Resize If two memory cards are inserted you can choose a destination for the resized copies by aL highlighting Choose destination and pressing gt Choose size if only one card is inserted proceed to Step 3 lt The menu shown at right will be displayed Resize g oose destination highlight a card slot and press D Slott GH 2 Slot2 3 Choose a size Resize Highlight Choose size and press P Select image 3 Choose destination Choose size The options shown at right will be displayed Resize highlight an option and press W ue ry 25m 1920x1280 2 5 M G3 S A 1 1M 1280x 856 1 1M 0 6m 960x 640 0 6 M j 0 3m 640x 424 0 3 M lt D 4 Choose pictures Resize Highlight Select image and press gt Select image Choose destination Choose size The dialog shown at right will be displayed ia highlight pictures using the multi selector and Fi 100ND600 fa press the QE ISO button to select or deselect to oN KM Fed view the highlighted picture full screen press and z VOJ Er m hold the amp QUAL button to view images in by a other locations as described on page 178 hold BKT and press A Selecte
286. playback MB icon Length Current position total length 2 i 100ND600 DSC_0013 HOV 15 04 2012 10 10 50 Movie progress bar Volume Guide The following operations can be performed To Description a Pause Pause playback Pla Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind y advance Speed increases with each press from 2x to 4x to 8x to 16x keep pressed to om Rewind skip to beginning or end of movie first frame is indicated by H advance in top right corner of monitor last frame by 4 If playback is paused movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time keep pressed for continuous rewind or advance Skip 10 s gt Rotate the main command dial to skip ahead or back 10s A Skip ahead N Use sub command dial to skip to next or previous index or to back Gan skip to the last or first frame if the movie contains no indices Adjust volume prea Press QUAL to increase volume amp amp ISO to decrease Trim movie 41 F2 See page 69 for more information Exit gt Exit to full frame playback Return to f Press the shutter release button halfway to exit to shooting shooting mode Z N mode 67 The k Icon Movies with indices M 60 are indicated by a icon in full frame ETETE ETAE playback D E AN Play i 100ND600 DSC_0013 MOV 15 04 2012 10 10 50 The N Icon N is displayed in full frame and movie playback if the movie was recorded w
287. plays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off automatically when the timer expires Choose a shorter standby timer delay for longer battery life c2 Standby timer c3 Self Timer MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the length of the shutter release delay the number of shots taken and the interval between shots in self timer mode e Self timer delay Choose the length of the shutter release delay CO 85 e Number of shots Press A and W to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter release button is pressed e Interval between shots Choose the interval between shots when the Number of shots is more than 1 c3 Self timer K Self timer delay Oils gt 1 Number of shots Interval between shots 05s c3 Self timer Self timer delay O2s 2s O5s 5s Olls 10 s 0K Oils 20 s c3 Self timer Number of shots c3 Self timer Interval between shots Sls 1s O25 2s 3s 3s 227 228 c4 Monitor off Delay MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations c4 Monitor off delay are performed during playback Playback defaults to 10 s and image review Image review defaults to 4 s when menus Menus defaults to 1 minute or information Information Image review Live view display defaults to 10 s are displayed or during liveviewand movie recording Live view defaults to 10 minutes
288. press gt to display a picture selection a as Monochrome dialog listing only NEF RAW images created with e z this camera i 2 Select a photograph NEF RAW processing Highlight a photograph to view the highlighted 100600 c photograph full frame press and hold the amp lt M FE ka QUAL button to view images in other locations q gt as described on page 178 hold BKT and press A y4 Press to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step zi Eee i A VAT tm OK 0 4 3 Choose settings for the JPEG copy Adjust the settings listed below Note that white balance and vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or pictures created with image overlay and that exposure compensation can only be set to values between 2 and 2 EV The Picture Control grid is not displayed when Picture Controls are adjusted NEF RAW processing Image quality NORM gt mage quality Q 93 Image size Q 95 White balance Q 115 Exposure compensation Q 112 Set Picture Control CO 129 High ISO NR 1 218 Vignette control Q 218 D Lighting A 264 ET e O OKO 271 272 4 Copy the photograph Highlight EXE and press to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph to exit without copying the photograph press the MENU button fn 1 100ND600 DSC_0013 JPG _ 15 04 2012 10 02 27 FF 6016x4016 Resize MENU button gt r retouch menu Create small co
289. r amp E button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame 1 Selecta picture In full frame playback select a retouched copy shown by a amp 4 icon or a photograph that has been retouched and press or 2 1 100ND600 DSC_00 15 04 2012 10 02 2 2 Select Side by side comparison RETOUCH MENU Highlight Side by side comparison and press Calor satch Al Perspective control f t Miniature effect mC Side by side comparison 9 Cancel 3 Compare the copy with the original The source image is displayed on the left the copy retouched copy on the right with the options I used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press lt or to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view a the highlighted picture full frame press and hold wl epic earl teach the amp QUAL button If the copy was created Source Retouched from two source images using Image overlay or image copy if the source has been copied multiple times press A or F to view the other source images or copies To exit to playback mode press the gt button or press to exit to playback with the highlighted image selected M Side by side Comparisons The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that was protected M 188 is on a locked memory card has since been deleted or hidden M 208 or is on a card in a different slot from that used whe
290. r child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury In addition note that small parts constitute a chocking hazard Should a child swallow any part of this equipment consult a physician immediately ZN Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection AN Do not remain in contact with the camera battery or charger for extended periods while the devices are on or in use Parts of the device become hot Leaving the device in direct contact with the skin for extended periods may result in low temperature burns Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor vehicle Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth Observe caution when using the flash
291. r4 retouch menu Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph The M4480x2984 BE Aspect selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown ee ae in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table NN CHRE RCON OK ET To Description Reduce size of crop Q1 ISO Press Q amp ISO to reduce the size of the crop Increase size of crop amp QUAL Press amp QUAL to increase the size of the crop e Changeeron asec ratio Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect d lt gt ratiosof3 2 4 3 5 4 1 1 and 16 9 A PAN Use multi selector to position the crop Press and hold to Position cro HE P sor move the crop rapidly to the desired position Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file Trim Image Quality and Size Be Aspect Copies created from NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG photos have an segs image quality A 93 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display ines ie Hie Viewing Cropped Copies Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed 265 Monochrome MENU button gt r retouch menu Copy photographs in Black and white Sepia or Monochrome Cyanotype blue and white monochrome Black and white gt Zi Sepia Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cy
292. raphs To take a photograph while recording is in progress press the shutter release button all the way down if desired shooting information display can be assigned to the Fn depth of field preview or AE L AF L button and the button used to display camera still photography settings before shooting M 247 248 Movie recording will end the footage recorded to that point will be saved and the camera will return to live view The photograph will be recorded at the current image area setting using a crop with an aspect ratio of 16 9 Photos will be taken with the flash off Note that the exposure for photographs can not be previewed during movie live view mode P S or Ais recommended but accurate results can be achieved in mode M by using the Fn depth of field preview or AE L AF L button M 247 248 using the button to display shooting information and checking the exposure indicator Exposure compensation for the photograph can be set to values between 5 and 5 EV but only values between 3 and 3 can be previewed in the monitor modes P S and A 1 112 The Count Down Display A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically QJ 53 Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available live view will still end automatically when the timer expires Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming movie r
293. re Controls In P S A and M modes you can choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene in other modes the camera selects a Picture Control automatically Option Description Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations Minimal processing for natural results Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors MC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs IPT Portrait Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel ALS Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes ASD Standard ENL Neutral IVI Vivid 1 Press KI iL ul Set Picture Control ISD Standard A list of Picture Controls will be displayed ENL Neutral EVI Vivid EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait FILS Landscape Grid Adjust E button 2 Choose a Picture Control Set ire Contr Highlight the desired Picture Control and NL Neutral press x EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait FILS Landscape CHIVGrid Adjust 129 130 Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu M 134 Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and compatible software M 1
294. re shown in stops from is specified maximum aperture gt lt Camera unable to focus using Change composition or focus 98 103 flashes autofocus manually f e No lens attached e Attach non IX Nikkor lens 25 285 If a CPU lens is attached remove and reattach the pa flashes lens e Non CPU lens attached e Select mode A or M 288 322 Indicator Control View panel Problem na e Use a lower ISO sensitivity 105 e In shooting mode Subject too bright photo will P Use optional ND filter 297 be overexposed S Increase shutter speed 76 A Choose a smaller aperture 77 higher f number e Usea higher ISO sensitivity 105 e In shooting mode Exposure indicators and shutter speed or aperture display flash Subject too dark photo willbe P Use flash 143 underexposed S Lower shutter speed 76 A Choose a larger aperture 77 pulb loutbselectedinmodes Change shutterspeedorselect 76 7g Sen en rere Change shutter speed or select 76 78 flashes mode M 54 eerste eater Wait until processing is o hes flashes J JP complete lower f number Bal Dal flas 5 If indicator flashes for 3s after Check photo in monitor if flash fires photo may be underexposed adjust settings 177 flashes underexposed and try again Memory insufficient to record e Reduce quality or size 93 95 Putt Fut further photos at current e Delete photographs 189 flashes flashes settings or c
295. re using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A Nikon product EE WARNINGS Keep the sun out of the frame Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control When operating the viewfinder diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally Z Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection ZN Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire ZN Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant o
296. rescent White balance 115 Fn button 92 149 174 242 247 F NUMDET esssesessesseeseeseens 73 77 288 Focal length ssecsssseseesees 173 291 Focal length scale ccessesecseees 25 Focal length scale index 25 Focal plane Mark 103 Focus indicator 38 102 103 FOCUS IOCK i cicnmomeumnimeunnn 102 FOCUS MOE cscscsecsssecseescescees 51 97 Focus mode switch 25 26 103 Focus point 38 52 99 101 103 222 223 Focus point wrap around 222 FOCUS tracking 97 222 Focus tracking with lock on 222 FOCUSING SCFECN ssssececeeeseeeeeee 327 Focus mode selector 51 97 Format memory card 31 250 Frame interval Slide show 213 Frame size frame rate 65 Framing QUICES sceseceeseees 55 62 Front curtain SYINC ceecececeeeeees 145 Full frame playback ssseeee 177 Full time servo AF c csesscseseceeees 51 FV LOCK ca caseitescienchisedvananrniernenenien 149 FX 36 X 24 1 0 Kivcsssesssscsssesessorseoees 90 FX format viiespictiesenasienativans 89 90 FX based movie format 63 G GP l inene 175 298 GPS E 175 183 OP o Gal die treatin 183 Green intensifier Filter effects 267 H 26 csictie eiusummunenewunee 329 IDI asesssceesvsssavesessines 56 64 204 333 HDMI mini pin connector 2 HDMI CEC ssssssssssssseessseesssssseeresssee 205 Headphones sssesesessssesss
297. ress gt Time lapse photography MENU button 160 2 Select a mode Multiple exposure Highlight Multiple exposure mode and Multiple exposure mode OFF gt press gt gt Number of shots 2 Auto gain ON Highlight one of the following and press Multiple exposure s A Multiple exposure mode To take a series of multiple exposures select ONS On series Multiple exposure lt gt Semon sarias shooting will continue until you select Off Sn Cingle photo for Multiple exposure mode To take one multiple exposure select On single photo Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have created a single multiple exposure To exit without creating additional multiple exposures select Off If On series or On single photo is om selected a icon will be displayed in the control panel Choose the number of shots Multiple exposure Highlight Number of shots and press P Multiple exposure mode OND Number of shots Auto gain ON Press A or W to choose the number of Multiple exposure exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 5 Number of shots 161 162 4 Choose the amount of gain Multiple exposure Highlight Auto gain and press gt Multiple exposure mode Number of shots Auto gain The following options will be displayed Malle exposure Highlight an option and press 6 ao e On Gain is adjusted according to number on S A
298. rightness gt ET Monitor brightness 0 o D ananena z E ore rai a 2 y P ree Dust Off ref photo y P bi Dust Off ref photo MENU button The setup menu contains the following options Option RA Option AA Format memory card 250 Image comment 253 Save user settings 81 Auto image rotation 254 Reset user settings 82 Battery info 255 Monitor brightness 250 Copyright information 256 Clean image sensor 301 Save load settings 257 Lock mirror up for cleaning 303 GPS 175 Image Dust Off ref photo 251 Virtual horizon 258 HDMI 205 Non CPU lens data 172 Flicker reduction 252 AF fine tune 259 Time zone and date 253 Eye Fi upload 2 260 Language 253 Firmware version 260 1 Not available when battery is low 2 Only displayed when compatible Eye Fi memory card is inserted M 260 See Also Menu defaults are listed on page 314 249 Format Memory Card MENU button gt 9 setup menu To begin formatting choose a memory card slot and select Yes Format memory card Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card in the selected slot Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required Y During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the and 3 ri buttons for more than two seconds 1 31 Monitor Brightness MENU button gt setup menu Adjust the brightness of the monitor for p
299. ripod is recommended to prevent blur the flash can also be used M 143 2 Silhouette Low Key Silhouette subjects against bright Use when shooting dark scenes to create backgrounds The built in flash turns off dark somber images that bring out use of a tripod is recommended to highlights The built in flash turns off prevent blur when lighting is poor use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor High Key 9 lt P P E LP KA Use when shooting bright scenes to create bright images that seem filled with light The built in flash turns off 45 46 Basic Playback 1 Press the M button A photograph will be displayed in the monitor The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or gt To view additional information on the current photograph press A and V M 179 To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review if rete DSC_0012 JPG NORMAL 10 44 1 Fx 36016 5 button fa i 100ND600 DSC_0001 IPE NORMAL 15 04 2012 10 02 28 Fx E6016x4016 NIKON D600 Jsi TN 8 1 125 F5 6 9100 85mm MBAUTO 0 0 sRGB KSD AUTO 100ND600 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2012 10 02 28 Fx E6016x4016 When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu M 212 photogra
300. ro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 software available separately Q 298 can be used to control the camera from a computer When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs and movies directly to the computer the PC connection indicator Ff will appear in the control panel 195 Printing Photographs Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer M 333 connected directly to the camera Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E15 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the printer do not connect the cable via a USB hub 3 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display PictBridge N 1 100ND600 DSC_0001 JPG _ 15 04 2012 10 02 28 Fx E6016x4016 196 Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the EN EL15 battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to sRGB 1 217 Y Selecting Photographs for Printing NEF RAW photographs M 93 can not be selected for printing JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu QQ 271 See
301. rol panel Nikon vE A PRE You WB button Sub command dial Control panel 4 Select direct measurement mode Release the n WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon in the control panel starts to flash A flashing F will also appear in the viewfinder The displays will flash for about six seconds 5 Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step 3 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus Protected Presets If the current preset is protected M 127 Ft will flash in the control panel and viewfinder if you attempt to measure a new value 122 6 Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel for about six seconds while the viewfinder will show a flashing UD P Da g Control panel K Viewfinder If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be lL unable to measure white balance A flashing an ia will appear in the control panel and viewfinder for about six seconds Press the shutter release button halfway to return to Step 5 and measure white balance Control panel again ae ed sno ide
302. rol setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Y Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in 0 landscape photographs Orange produces more contrast than yellow red R o Red more contrast than orange G Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing V when Toning is selected displays saturation options Monochrome Press lt or gt to adjust saturation Saturation control is not available SIRIEI Contrast when B amp W black and white is selected Brightness Filter effects Sepia 4 O CE Grid G Reset GAOK 133 134 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture Control in the shooting menu To display the menus press the MENU button Highlight Manage Picture Control in the shooting menu and press P 2 Select Save edit Highlight Save edit and press P 3 Select a Picture Control Highlight an existing Picture Control and press or press 8 to proceed to Step 5 to sa
303. rom the exposure of photographs taken in live view e Center weighted or spot metering is selected M 109 e The camera is in mode M e The subject is too bright or too dark e Active D Lighting is in effect M 137 e The photograph is a long time exposure 79 e The flash is used M 143 Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording Choose an option for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply GA 252 Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording A flashing sign flash or other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie recording Menu item can not be selected Some options are not available in all modes Shooting P S A M Shutter release disabled e Non CPU lens is attached rotate camera mode dial to A or M CQ 288 e Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of tin 2 amp selected in mode M choose new shutter speed M 76 Full range of shutter speeds not available Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using compatible flash units choose 1 250 s Auto FP or 1 200 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds M 234 Colors are unnatural e Adjust white balance to match light source M 115 e Adjust Set Picture Control settings M 129 Can not measure white balance Subject is too dark or too bright M 123 Image can not be selected as source for preset white b
304. rs 333 334 Approved Memory Cards The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the camera Cards with class 6 or faster write soeeds are recommended for movie recording Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used SD cards SDHC cards 2 SDXC cards gt anise 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB Toshiba Panasonic 5 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 24 GB 32 GB 48 GB 64 GB Lexar Media 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 4GB 8GB 16 GB 32 GB _ Full HD Video OO OS 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards 2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC compliant The camera supports UHS 1 3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card willbe usedare S2 Sop SDXC compliant The camera supports UHS 1 XC XC I Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on an 8 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS I card at different image quality M 93 image size M 95 and image area settings M 89 EE FX 36x24 Image Area Image quality Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless 23 4MB 22 compressed 12 bit NEF RAW Lossless NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit 207MB 258 27 NEF RAW Compressed
305. rsor over an object and press the t AE L AF L button to select the color of the object as one that will remain in the final copy the camera may have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors choose a saturated color To zoom in on the picture for precise color selection press amp QUAL Press Q1 ISO to zoom out Tay Atk a a Cal OK BY 117 Z art AE L AF L button 4 Highlight the color range Color range Rotate the main command dial to highlight the color range for the selected color GAReset DAdjust OK KE 277 5 Choose the color range Press A or W to increase or decrease the range of similar hues that will be included in the final photograph or movie Choose from values between 1 and 7 note that higher values may include hues from other colors The effect can be previewed in the edit display OE WEA Schange 6 Select additional colors To select additional colors rotate the main command dial to highlight another of the three color boxes at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3 5 to select another color Repeat for a third color if desired To deselect the highlighted color press 1 r or press and hold T rim to remove all colors 7 Save the edited copy Press k to copy the photograph 1 100ND600 DSC_ 15 04 2012 10 0 Fx 36016x4016 278 Side by side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs This option is only available if o
306. rture The Exposure Indicator If a shutter speed other than bulb or time is selected the exposure indicator in the viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl A 224 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 1 3 EV or 1 2 EV the illustrations below show the display in the viewfinder when 1 3 step is selected for Custom Setting b2 If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash Optimal exposure Underexposed by 1 3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV See Also For information reversing the exposure indicators so that negative values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left see Custom Setting f8 Reverse indicators Q 246 78 EE Long Time Exposures M Mode Only Select the following shutter speeds for long time exposures of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks E e Bulb Hu x The shutter remains open while Si IN the shutter release button is held down To Length SOE 355 prevent blur use a tripod or an optional Aperture f 25 MC DC2 remote cord M 298 e Time Requires an optional ML L3 remote control 298 Start the exposure by pressing the ML L3 shutter release button The shutter remains open for thirty minutes or until the button is pressed a second time 1 Ready the camera Mount
307. rture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit supports AA auto aperture mode e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex NIKKOR lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR 172 The camera can store data for up to nine non CPU lenses To enter or edit data for a non CPU lens 1 Select Non CPU lens data Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Non CPU lens data in the setup menu and press P 2 Choose a lens number Highlight Lens number and press lt or P to choose a lens number between 1 and 9 3 Enter the focal length and aperture Highlight Focal length mm or Maximum aperture and press lt or P to edit the highlighted item Focal length can be selected from values between 6 and 4 000 mm maximum aperture from values between f 1 2 and f 22 Focal Length Not Listed MENU button SETUP MENU GPS Virtual horizon Non CPU lens data AF fine tune Firmware version Non CPU lens data Done Lens number Focal length mm Maximum aperture Focal length mm Maximum
308. s a A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press Press 4 again to aa exit when copying is complete dares m Copying Images Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination card Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies If the destination folder contains an image with the a aaee same name as one of the images to be copied a A a confirmation dialog will be displayed Select Replace ps existing image to replace the image with the image to sa be copied or select Replace all to replace all existing kip images with the same names without further prompting To continue without replacing the image select Skip or select Cancel to exit without copying any further images Protect status is copied with the images but print marking QU 202 is not Hidden images can not be copied 211 Image Review MENU button gt playback menu Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the jy ase review monitor immediately after shooting If Off is selected pictures can only be displayed by pressing the gt button After Delete MENU button gt playback menu Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame previous picture will be displayed Display previous picture If deleted picture was first frame following picture will be displaye
309. s CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment XIX XX Notices e No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Notices for Customers in Europe CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste e For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of waste management e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bri
310. s 120 White balance fine tuning ssss sssse ss 117 PRESET manual nesnisesonmanniosonss 121 Current channel Histogram RGB channel In all histograms horizontal axis gives pixel brightness vertical axis number of pixels 6l Histogram red channel 7 Image highlights Histogram green channel F Folder number frame number su s 215 J Histogram blue channel 1 Flashing areas indicate highlights areas that may be overexposed for the current channel Hold amp amp ISO button and press lt or P to cycle through channels as follows RGB 7 all hannel T teh free rie Highlight display off Qm ISO button 2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format M 63 89 Playback Zoom To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed press amp QUAL Use the amp QUAL and amp ISO buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications Some sample histograms are shown below If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left If the image is bright tone distribution
311. s and hold the hi KM FA amp QUAL button to view images in other a pe locations as described on page 178 holdBKT and 8 pe AZoon IOK press A Retouch The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with other devices 3 Select retouch options For more information see the section for the selected item To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU EE OK RYT Monitor off Delay The monitor will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no actions are performed for a brief period Any unsaved changes will be lost To increase the time the monitor remains on choose a longer menu display time for Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay V 228 4 Create a retouched copy Press k to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a 4 icon NORMAL Fx 6016x4016 262 Creating Retouched Copies During Playback Retouched copies can also be created during playback RETOUCH MENU Eh D Lighting MY Trim OH Monochrome Filter effects i 100ND600 DSC D001 T 2 Cancel 15 04 2012 10 02 28 O60 Display picture full frame and Highlight an option and press or amp E press OTe OK YN Create retouched copy 263 D Lighting MENU button gt p retouch menu D lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs Before A fter Press A or W to choose the amount of correction performed D Lighting The effect c
312. s complete The icon clears from the display when multiple exposure shooting ends BE Interrupting Multiple Exposures To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of EMMETT A Multiple exposure mode exposures have been taken select Off for multiple exposure mode If shooting ends before the specified number of mB On Gai exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created ap from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e Atwo button reset is performed M 151 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted m Multiple Exposures Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view Taking photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off Noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines may appear in photographs taken with Off selected for auto gain 1 162 The information listed in the playback photo information display including metering exposure shooting mode focal length date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval un
313. s much brighter or darker For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu 173 PN To choose a metering option press the wes H button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel See Also For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b5 Fine tune optimal exposure M 226 Control panel Viewfinder 109 110 Autoexposure Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using center weighted metering and spot metering to meter exposure Note that matrix metering will not produce the desired results 1 Lock exposure Shutter release button Position the subject in the selected focus point Za and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the art AE L AF L button to lock focus and exposure if you are using autofocus confirm that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfi nder AE L AE L AF L AF L While exposure lock is in effect an AE L indicator a ee ET will appear in the viewfinder 2 Recompose the photograph Keeping the t AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Metered Area In spot metering exposure will
314. s not set and a icon flashes in the information display the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary Insert a Memory Card The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital SD memory cards available separately M 334 The camera has two memory card slots Slot 1 and Slot 2 if you will be using only one memory card insert it in Slot 1 A 30 1 Turn the camera off Inserting and Removing Memory Cards Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Slide the card slot cover out and open the card slot 3 Insert the memory card Holding the memory card as shown at right slide it in until it clicks into place The memory card access lamp will light for a few seconds m Inserting Memory Cards Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card Check to be sure the card isin Memory card access the correct orientation The card slot cover will not close ifthe 4p card is not correctly inserted x Close the memory card slot cover If this is the first time the memory card will be used in the camera or the card has been formatted in another device format the card as described on pag
315. s or a row of EE windows in a skyscraper ommon See Also to fine details Example A field of flowers or other subjects that are j small or lack variation in KY brightness For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection A 221 For information on using release priority in single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection Q 221 See page 51 for information on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording AF Area Mode Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected e Single point AF Select the focus point as described on page 101 the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only Use with stationary subjects e Dynamic area AF Select the focus point as described on page 101 In AF A and AF C focus modes the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the selected point The number of focus points varies with the mode selected 9 point dynamic area AF Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track 21 point dynamic area AF Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game 39 point dynamic area AF Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly
316. s photos at selected intervals to create a silent time lapse movie using the options currently selected for Movie settings in the shooting menu M 65 Before Shooting Before beginning time lapse photography take a test shot at current settings framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure preview and view the results in the monitor To record changes in brightness choose manual exposure M 78 for consistent coloration choose a white balance setting other than auto M 115 We recommend that you briefly switch to movie live view and check the current image area crop in the monitor 1 57 note however that time lapse photography is not available in live view Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted use an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector or a fully charged EN EL15 battery 1 Select Time lapse photography inthe SHOOTING ME shooting menu on ewosure NR Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Time lapse photography in the A u ISO sensitivity settings r Remote control mode EF Multiple exposure Interval timer shooting shooting menu and press gt MU Time lapse photography MENU button 2 Press Press gt to proceed to Step 3 and choose an interval and shooting time To record a time gt 00 0005 lapse movie using the default interval of 5 00 10 1 8927 7
317. service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com xxiii Package Conten
318. sesevebueveaive 40 SCEE tPS aissein 229 SD memory card 29 31 96 334 335 Select date 191 199 208 Selective COOP 277 Self tIMEL es eeseseeeeeees 6 83 85 227 SENSITIVITY sesessssesssessssessseo 105 107 Sepia Monochrome 266 Set Picture Control 129 Setup MENU ssessesssesssessesseesseessesseos 249 Shade White balance 115 Shooting data ccsecseceeeeeeeees 182 SHOOTING MENU ccscsesseseeeeeeeees 214 Shutter speed qu eeseseseseseees 76 78 Shutter priority AUTO 76 Shutter release button 38 39 102 110 226 248 Shutter release button AE L 226 Side by side comparison 279 Single FLAME c sesesssesessessecseeseees 6 83 Single point AF uu sseseceees 99 100 Single servo AF 00 51 97 221 SIZG sts reece ieee 63 95 Size priority JPEG compression 94 Skylight Filter effects 267 Slide SHOW uu esesessssesscsessseesseeseeees 213 Slot esssssoesesesssssseeessssssssscsceess 30 96 178 Slot empty release lock 246 SIOW SYNC nssssssoessseeesssseerssseessse 144 145 SMOOthiNg sssseessseesssssesssseersssersssees 141 Soft Filter effects 267 Speaker eeesesesscsesscsesssecsessesestesees 3 4 Speedlight csessessesessssesseesesees 292 SDOL ARAT 109 SROB eee aren ere pen een 217 Standard Set Picture Control 129 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR 146 Standby timet
319. shutter speeds Using a GP 1 GPS unit Using an Eye Fi card Using a WU 1b wireless mobile adapter Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL15 batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused 337 338 Index Symbols O AUTO MOE ccsesseecsseeseeeees 35 36 Auto flash off mode 35 36 SCENE SCEN eesessessessecseeseeseesees 40 Portrait essessssssesesssssssssessseecceseee 41 Landscape ss sssssessseesssseeesse 41 E Child sssssssssssssssssseccorsersessssssssss 41 R Sports anuascncawerianiseitin 41 Y Close Up sicsecasssssassteceseesteanessseaases 42 Pi Night portrait cesses 42 Night landscape 42 X Party indoor esseeceeceeseesees 42 28 BEACH SNOW ecsessesseesseeseesseeees 43 SUNSET cececseesessesseesssseeseeseenees 43 ii DUSK GAWN esessessessesecsesteseeee 43 W Pet portrait ose 43 Candlelight cessesssecseeseesseeees 44 B BIOSSOM ssesssssssessessecsecseesseneees 44 Autumn colors essecsseseeseeeees 44 MAF OOO ininasiinsudwinansneion 44 A SHNOUCTHE 0 ee esesesseeeeeseenees 45 Mi High KEY sacesteiacs tocsseraacecewreiercives 45 Low key 2sieshscvecsctasnteeeicaannce 45 P Programmed auto
320. sing the Edit movie option in the retouch RETOUCH MENU Miniature effect Wi menu ma 261 Selective color 8 M Edit movie Ne 7 71 Saving Selected Frames To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still 1 View the movie and choose a frame See aoe Play the movie back as described on page lt 67 your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar Press lt or gt to rewind or advance and press W to pause the movie at the frame you intend to copy 2 Display movie edit options Press the E button to display movie Edit movie edit options Save selected frame Cancel 3 Choose Save selected frame Highlight Save selected frame and press Edit movie KM Choose start end point Save selected frame 0K Cancel 4 Create a still copy Press A to create a still copy of the current frame 5 Save the copy Highlight Yes and press to create a fine quality A 93 JPEG copy of the selected frame Movie stills are indicated by a Micon in full frame playback Save Selected Frame JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo information A 179 72 P S A and M Modes P S A and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture Of 4 Cy Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring M 287
321. speeds slower than the minimum value may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity Press to exit when settings are complete 107 When On is selected the viewfinder and control panel show ISO AUTO When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user these indicators flash and the altered value is shown in viewfinder Ps ze On E e R soff am fool i LK Control panel Viewfinder Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 218 When a flash is used the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 234 Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes available with the built in flash and the optional flash units listed on page 293 possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control On or Off You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or off by pressing the Q18 ISO button and rotating the sub WB command dial ISO AUTO is displayed when auto ISO O sensitivity control is on A I Qm ISO button Sub command dial 108 Exposure M e
322. ss filter Turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL15 battery or connect an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5b AC adapter The Lock mirror up for cleaning option is only available in the setup menu at battery levels over aa 2 Remove the lens Turn the camera off and remove the lens 3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning afl Lock mirror up for cleaning Turn the camera on and press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press gt MENU button 4 Press The message shown at right will be When shtterrleae button i displayed in the monitor and a row of dashes A and will appear in the control panel and To lower mirror turn camera off viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off Di a 303 304 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will flash Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 8 Clean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as
323. sseessseessssessssse 182 256 CPU contacts sissedcciusstarseanetenieinaeis 287 CPU lens wi csetucrectcsntienientss 26 285 Creative Lighting System 293 Cross screen Filter effects 267 CUSTOM Settings sse ssesssseesseesseess 219 Customize command dials 245 Cyanotype Monochrome 266 D Date and tiM ceceeceeees 27 253 Date format 27 253 Daylight saving tiMe 27 253 CE E E E 217 333 Default settings 151 214 221 312 Delayed remote Remote control PYROS isinisisi 85 Delet aesiccschs acacia 47 189 Delete all IMAGES cecseseceees 190 Delete current image 47 189 Delete selected images 190 Depth of field ou eesessesseseeseseeees 77 Depth of field preview button 60 77 241 244 248 Destination Movie settings 65 Device control HDMIl 205 Digital Print Order Format 199 202 333 Diopter adjustment control 33 297 Direct sunlight White balance 115 Distortion control 0 esesceeeeeee 274 D Lighting ee essessessecseceecseeseeeeeee 264 DPOF acheter 199 202 333 DPOF print Order 202 DX 24 X 16 1 5 X ceesssecceessees 63 90 DX TOMMAL sisahnensineinarnnsce 89 90 DX based movie format 63 Dynamic area AF eee 99 100 E Easy exposure compensation 225 Edit MOVIE cininuusiwunamnenie 69 Electronic rangefindet 103 EV steps for exposure c
324. sssesssecseeseeees 174 BEY Fn button assignment csssossseesessesseeeessee 242 GG AE L AF L button assignment sssesssssseessesen 244 Remote control MOE csssssssssssssssessesssecsesseecssees 85 KFJ Long exposure noise reduction indicator 218 GE Role played by card in slot 2 essessssssseessssssee 96 White balance sssssssscsscnccnscsscnsesseseesseaseees 115 White balance fine tuning indicator 118 Auto area AF indicator cscsssssesesseseeeeesee 100 FOCUS POINTS indicator esseseeseseeseseeseeeseesees 101 AF area mode indicator esesessesseeseeseeteeeeeees 100 3D tracking indicator ssssesssssesssssseeessssessssssees 100 PJ mage quality sssini 93 23 IMAGE SIZE E E 95 Flash MOde nss ssssssesssssssesstssssessresssnnsressnssorsessssorsss 144 10 25262728 29 30 31 ee es ee 27E CLOCK EE ADL BK E ESD Fx fe E Om ATAA p gag i34 ISO are au 36 ee ee P 38 oso pA arene N SOF ON 48 CL O OPO 44 43 42 41 40 25 Image area indicator cesesssssecsecsecscsecesceseeseesees 90 E Metering esre 109 Auto distortion CONTIOL seccssssccsseecsssecssseecessees 217 BE Clock not set indicator sssossscesessessee 28 253 EZ Image comment indicatOr ssssssseessssseseensen 253 EX Copyright information 256 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 153 WB bracketing indicatOr cscsecsecsscessesseseees
325. ssssesscsssessssecsssssscseees 53 The Information Display Live View Photography sssseesssseesssseessseeesseeesssseesssseessseees 55 PVA MUON ANT OC UNS E E E E E E PE SEEE E P E 55 Movie Live View 57 ao el ER PO E E E E E E E E E re nee ee eer 60 The Live View Display Movie Live View ss sssesseesssessseessseesssessseessseesseesseeosseeossersseesss 61 The Information Display Movie Live VieW sessesssseesssseesssseessseeesseeeosseesssseesssserssseees 62 Mage ATOE sisena Ra 63 MOVO ETIR a E nc vr ne Cerri pe Cnn nr Semen a yer tee cerca corer ener 65 VIEWING MOVIES risiti iien eter EE ET EEANN EEA 67 EUN MOVICS e E A ENEE AEE OEE 69 TERANG MOVIS serosa aeae i EEEE EGEE aren rere terre reer 69 Saving Sclected FANGS eren isar a R E S 72 xi P S A and M Modes 73 Pe PROGM AAI AMIE aa E E aoe see 75 S Shutter Priority AUTO sessnsissoesnnmniennno iea nn 76 A Aperture Priority AUtO sessesssessessesssesecseesserseresesseoseesscsscoeeoseeseeoserseroseoseessossessceseeseessresee 77 Me N Ol A EE E 78 Long Time Exposures M Mode Onlly cssssssssecssesscsssecsssessssssecsssecscsesesassesscsssscees 79 User Settings U1 and U2 Modes 81 Saving User Settings ieies ni annae ani a mT vee 81 Recalling User Settings sssesseesesesssseesseesseessserssseesseesseeosseeosseesseesssessseeossersseesseeosssrosseesseess 82 Resetting User Settings sssisssesissrsssiisssnebiinsannneissisnihacosnstseraenssiiiaanb
326. sssssssecssscsecssssenssesasenssecassscssessesenses Printing PHOTOGFAPNS csssssssesssssscccscsessssssescsescsessssesesesesesessssesesescseseeesees Connecting the Printer seseesssessseessseesseesssessseeosseesseessseosseeossersseessseessseesss Printing Pictures One at a TiMe ssessessssssessessesssesseesesseessesseessessesseeseessesse Printing Multiple PiCtUreS s eseesssessssesseesseesssesssseesseesssesnseeosseeosseesseessseessee Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set sesessseessseesseesssessseeosseesseessseesss Viewing Photographs on TV sssesssesssesssesssesssessseessessseesseesseesseesseeoseesseesseossee Menu Guide gt The Playback Menu Managing Images sssssssssssssssssssesssssssssesssessesssseasees PAY ACK FOLIE oinn A POCI E rA T E E Playback Display OptiOnS sssessseesssessseesssersseesssesssseosseesseesnseosseeossersseess CODY Mage S sprengen a a ante inage ROV EW eee enter en eee a er a ene menor Nt eet rete n Anor DETO senunni mere Tn meet reeset mene eee re tc aren ery eee err ROCO Fe eae ee eee oeene nse one ones tree eae nea ere rheeee eeee NMS DON raea EE ereseeteernss O The Shooting Menu Shooting Options ssssssscsessssesesssssssssssesesessesessssesesees Reset Shooting Menu s sssessssesssseesseesssesssseesseesssessseeosseeosseesseessseosserossees Storage Folge anne Me ankaraa E PUN IN enn a E E A Auto Distortion Control sssssssssersssseessseessssessss
327. sub command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor PHEN AF mode button Sub command Monitor dial The Live View Display Live View Photograph Item 1 Time remaining 2 Guide 3 Autofocus mode 4 AF area mode 5 Focus point Monitor brightness indicator 7 Exposure indicator DO A a AF SIS OFF SDICP As NORMIE ty S COOU Description The amount of time remaining before live view ends automatically Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less A guide to the options available during live view photography The current autofocus mode The current focus point The display varies with the option Keeping the WB button pressed press A or W to adjust monitor brightness note that monitor brightness has no effect on photographs taken with the camera If A auto is selected the camera will automatically adjust brightness in response to ambient lighting conditions as measured by the ambient brightness sensor when the monitor is on Q 4 Indicates whether the photograph would be under or overexposed at current settings mode M only 78 53 54 The Live View Display Although they will not appear in the final picture jagged edges color fringing moire and bright spots may appear in the monitor while bright bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly il
328. t White balance 2 Selecta preset f r d 1 id 2 d 3 egal OE ram OKAY 18 d 1 White balance 3 Select Edit comment Preset manual d 1 Fine tune Edit comment Select image Protect d 1 White balance 4 Edit the comment 0123456789MBCDE FGHIJKLMNOPQRST UVWXYZabcdefghi Jklmnoparstuvwx ExeCursor Gilnput CIOK EE Protecting a White Balance Preset Follow the steps below to protect the selected white balance preset Protected presets can not be modified and the Fine tune and Edit comment options can not be used 1 Select PRE Preset manual White balance 4 Choose color A Highlight Preset manual in the white PRE Preset manual balance menu and press gt Adjust 2 Selecta preset White balance Highlight the desired preset and press mac Q 150 os d 1 Select OK S11 3 Select Protect White bale Highlight Protect and press gt Be Fine tune Edit comment Select image Protect d 1 4 Select On White balance Highlight On and press to protect the ae selected white balance preset To remove protection select Off 127 128 Image Enhancement Picture Controls P S A and M Modes Only Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings including sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue among compatible devices and software Selecting a Picture Control The camera offers a choice of preset Pictu
329. t 276 NEF RAW processing 271 amp Selective color 277 Cm Resize 272 Nt Edit movie 69 C Quick retouch 273 mC Side by side comparison 279 1 Can only be selected by pressing MENU and selecting r tab 2 Only available if or amp E is pressed in full frame playback when a retouched image or Original is displayed m Retouching Copies Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie gt Choose start end point each option can be applied only once note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail Options that can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim Image overlay NEF RAW processing and Resize copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original while copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format 261 Creating Retouched Copies To create a retouched copy 1 Select an item in the retouch menu 5 __ETOUCH MEND ignting Press A or to highlight an item gt to select Rave correction rim Monochrome Filter effects Color balance Image overlay NEF RAW processing 2 Selecta picture Color balance Highlight a picture and press to view the ey 100N0600 th highlighted picture full screen pres
330. t Hide or reveal selected pictures Selecting this option displays a list of dates To hide all a pictures taken on a date highlight the date and press gt o 16 04 2012 rm Ea Selectdate Selected dates are marked by a v to reveal all pictures ELISAN taken on a selected date highlight it and press Press to complete the operation Confirm MOK Deselect all Reveal all pictures Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image Follow the steps below to hide or reveal selected pictures 1 Choose Select set js Hide image Highlight Select set and press P Select date Deselect all 2 Select pictures gy Hte imase Use the multi selector to scroll through the i 10010600 t pictures on the memory card to view the A KM ka highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp QUAL button to view images in iglia other locations as described on page 178 Qm Aso button hold BKT and press A and press 8 ISO to select the current picture Selected pictures are marked by a X icon to deselect a picture highlight it and press amp amp ISO again Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected 3 Press 6R Press K to complete the operation Playback Display Options MENU button gt playback menu Choose the information available in the playback pj thas via tin photo information display M 179 Press A or V Basic ph
331. t date of recording on all pictures in print order 5 Complete the print order pa 220E pri order Highlight Done and press to complete the print order Print shooting data M Print date DPOF Print Order To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order M 199 DPOF print date and shooting data options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order NEF RAW photographs M 93 can not be selected using this option JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu QQ 271 Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created 203 Viewing Photographs on TV A type C mini pin High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown
332. t highlighted item Cancel and return to Select highlighted item or previous menu display sub menu Move cursor down Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus Press the MENU button to display the menus F0 a CTT as 20 0 e D MENU button 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu OE P i ormat memory car Press lt to highlight the icon for the current S Save user settings Reset user settings menu onitor brightness S Clean image sensor E Lock mirror up for cleaning Image Dust Off ref photo P HDMI 3 Select a menu PLAYBACK MENU ete Press A or W to select the desired menu A Playback folder CECE T Playback display options Copy image s Image review After delete P Rotate tall 4 Position the cursor in the selected menu 2 PLAYBACK MENU Press to position the cursor in the selected menu Delete Playback folder Hide image Playback display options Copy image s E Image review After delete Rotate tall ND600 is ON 19 5 Highlight a menu item sa R elete Press A or W to highlight a menu item 7 Playback folder NDOO Hide image Xi T Playback display options Copy image s Lill image review OFF After delete Ct Rotate tall ON 6 Display options a Image review Press to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option Press A or W to highlight an option
333. te ri n g P S A and M Modes Only Choose how the camera sets exposure in P S A and M modes in other modes the camera selects the metering method automatically Option Description Matrix Produces natural results in most situations Camera meters a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone distribution color composition and with type G or D lenses M 287 distance information 3D color matrix metering II with other CPU lenses camera uses color matrix metering II which does not include 3D distance information With non CPU lenses camera uses color matrix metering if focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data option in setup menu M 173 otherwise camera uses center weighted metering Center weighted Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area if CPU lens is attached size of area can be selected using Custom Setting b4 Center e weighted area M 226 if non CPU lens is attached area is 12 mm in diameter Classic meter for portraits recommended when using filters with an exposure factor filter factor over 1x Spot Camera meters circle 4 mm 0 16 in in diameter approximately 1 5 of frame Circle is centered on current focus point making it possible to meter off center subjects L if non CPU lens is used or if auto area AF is in effect camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background i
334. ted 3 1 EV in increments of 3 or 1 2 EV Lights when built in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged flashes after flash is fired at full output ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built in flash SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 or SB 700 as a master flash and SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes or SU 800 as commander built in flash can serve as master flash in commander mode Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units AS 15 sync terminal adapter available separately Auto 2 types incandescent fluorescent 7 types direct sunlight flash cloudy shade preset manual up to 4 values can be stored choose color temperature 2500 K 10000 K all with fine tuning Live view photography still images movie live view movies e Autofocus AF Single servo AF AF S full time servo AF AF F e Manual focus M Face priority AF wide area AF normal area AF subject tracking AF Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame camera selects focus point automatically when face priority AF or subject tracking AF is selected TTL exposure metering using main image sensor Matrix e 1 920 x 1 080 30 p progressive 25 p 24 p e 1 280 x 720 60 p 50 p 30 p 25 p Actual frame rates for 60 p 50 p 30 p 25 p and 24 p
335. tensifier Cross screen Soft Color balance Image overlay NEF RAW processing Resize Select image Choose destination Choose size Quick retouch Straighten Distortion Auto control Manual Fisheye Color outline Color sketch Perspective control Miniature effect Selective color Edit movie Choose start end point Save selected frame Side by side comparison 2 1 Available only when MENU button is pressed and c4 tab selected in menus 2 Only available when or i E button is pressed to display retouch menu during full frame playback fa MY MENU M 280 Add items Playback menu Shooting menu Custom setting menu Setup menu Retouch menu Remove items Rank items Choose tab My Menu Recent settings Items can also be deleted by highlighting them in MY MENU and pressing the T r button twice Table of Contents BP MACON e A E A E S ii Mena ONUD oare A E deus aes seas ees iv F r Your Safety siirron ineen EE A iA ERE xviii NORN OS eA A A A E E A EA AE XX AGHA E AE e A A A E E XXIV Introduction 1 Getting TO KNOW the CaMePa cscsssssessssssssssesessssssescscscsessssesesesescsescssesesescseseseseeseseseseseesees 1 Tre cimed BOOY sonreir cans iar EEE NE 1 The MOOG Dh erena E 5 The Release Mode Dial vcscseesssceucavascateceastesecatostaceiuerienrascavsesausesdesvocseactistecnensvesseqnentvenensstieneiten 6 The Conto Pane resonis niii eri Ear s iin TEREE 7 T
336. the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions e Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately M Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D600 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replac
337. the cable supplied with the GP 1 allowing information on the camera s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken Turn the camera off before connecting the GP 1 for more information see the GP 1 manual EE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Standby timer Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when the GP 1 is attached Option Description Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer M 227 to allow the camera Enable time to acquire GPS data the delay is extended by up to one minute after the exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on This reduces the drain on the battery Disable Exposure meters do not turn off while the GP 1 is connected e Position This item is only available if the GP 1 is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude and Coordinated Universal Time UTC as reported by the GP 1 e Use GPS to set camera clock Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock The Icon Connection status is shown by the E icon e static Camera has established communication with GP 1 Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is displayed include an addit
338. the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap 2 86 To prevent loss of power before the exposure is complete use a fully charged EN EL15 battery or an optional EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector Note that noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for Long exposure NR in the shooting menu M 218 2 Rotate the mode dial to M Mode dial s AA Mi 79 80 3 Choose a shutter speed While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed Of ter bb EZZ For a shutter speed of time select remote control release mode M 85 after choosing the shutter speed 4 Open the shutter Bulb After focusing press the shutter release button on the camera or optional remote cord all the way down Keep the shutter release button pressed until the exposure is complete Time Press the ML L3 shutter release button all the way down 5 Close the shutter Bulb Take your finger off the shutter release button Time Press the ML L3 shutter release button all the way down Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes User Settings U1 and U2 Modes Assign frequently used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial
339. the lens focus mode switch if present Focus mode selector and camera focus mode selector to M m AF Lenses Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus mode switch set to M and the camera focus mode selector set to AF Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or lens e Manual focus lenses Set the camera focus mode selector to M To focus manually adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus EE The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 39 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in focus indicator is displayed Note that with the subjects listed on page 98 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark e on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in Focal plane mark
340. the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap before shooting M 86 2 Press the button The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder button 3 Position the focus point Position the focus point over your subject as described on page 51 4 Focus Press the shutter release button halfway to focus The focus point will flash green while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will flash red note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point flashes red check focus in the monitor before shooting Exposure can be locked by pressing the art AE L AF L button M 110 focus locks while the shutter release button is pressed halfway In mode M exposure can be adjusted with the assistance of an exposure indicator M 78 49 5 Take the picture Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot The monitor will turn off 6 Exit live view mode Press the L button to exit live view mode m Ending Live View Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view may also end automatically to prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits exit live view when the camera is not in use Note that the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may rise and noise bright spots
341. the viewfinder and control panel displays when cleaning is complete Y rm m 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 251 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit increasing recording times If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data Exposure settings are not and the message shown at right will be displayed Choose sense another reference object and repeat the process from and try again step 1 M Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Select Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs m Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses
342. ther stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter N 301 303 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain 306 Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If you are using an AC adapter unplug the adapter to prevent fire If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away Notes on the monitor The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision at least 99 99 of pixels are effective with no mor
343. they are connected Output Resolution Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device HDMI Output resolution If Auto is selected the camera will automatically select the appropriate format Regardless of the option on progressive selected Auto will be used for movie live view movie n recording and playback SERIO Device Control If On is selected for HDMI gt Device control in the setup menu when the camera is connected to a television that supports HDMI CEC and both the camera and television are on the display shown at right will appear on the television and the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi selector and button during full frame playback and slide shows If Off is selected the television remote can not be used to control the camera Slide show HDMI and Live View HDMI displays connected via an HDMI cable can be used for live view photography and movie live view M 49 57 During movie live view and movie recording HDMI output is adjusted according to the option selected for Movie settings gt Frame size frame rate in the shooting menu 1 65 Note that some HDMI devices may not support the selected setting in this case select 1080i interlaced for HDMI gt Output resolution Movies may be output at a frame size smaller than that selected for Frame size frame rate M 65 HDMI CEC Devices When the camera is connected to an HDMI CEC device EF will appear in the co
344. til the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and interval timer shooting will end if On single photo is selected for multiple exposure mode multiple exposure shooting will also end automatically Other Settings While a multiple exposure is being shot memory cards can not be formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be changed 163 Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals I Before Shooting Do not select self timer remote m or Mup release mode when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Before choosing a starting time select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date M 253 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the camera EN EL15 battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5b AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately 1 Select Interval timer shooting in the q s SHOOTING MENU E Vignette control ON shooting men
345. ting is poor e AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED e AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VR II e AF S DX NIKKOR 18 300mm f 3 5 5 6GEDVR e AF Zoom Nikkor 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S DX NIKKOR 55 300mm f 4 5 5 6GEDVR e AF S Zoom Nikkor 80 200mm f 2 8D IF ED e AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 70 200mm f 2 8G IF ED Calculating Angle of View The D600 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm 135 format cameras If Auto DX crop is on 1 90 and a 35mm format lens is attached the angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35mm film 35 9 x 24 0 mm if a DX lens is attached the angle of view will automatically be adjusted to 23 5 x 15 7 mm DX format Ifa 35 mm format lens is attached the angle of view can be reduced by 1 5 x by turning Auto DX crop off and selecting DX 24x16 FX 36x24 picture size 35 9 x 24 0 mm equivalent to 35mm format camera Picture diagonal DX 24x16 picture size 23 5 x 15 7 mm equivalent to DX format camera Angle of view FX 36x24 35mm format Angle of view DX 24x 16 DX format The DX 24x16 angle of view is about 1 5 times smaller than the 35mm format angle of view To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when DX 24x16 is selected multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1 5 for example the effective focal length of a 50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX 24x16 is selected 291 292 Optional Flash Units Speedlights The camera supports the Ni
346. tion with an ambient temperature of 15 to 25 C 59 to 77 F avoid hot or extremely cold locations Repeat this process at least once every six months e Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery life Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use e The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance and the battery may not charge or charge only partially Wait for the battery to cool before charging 307 308 Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement Purchase a new EN EL15 battery Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL15 battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice Note that on cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Used batteries are a valuable resource recycle in
347. tion in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted CA 31 250 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback Tae N i 100ND600 DSC_0001 JPG 15 04 2012 10 02 28 Fx 26016x4 Full frame playback Thumbnail playback Calendar playback 2 Press the Yon WB button The photograph will be marked with a el icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted display the photograph or highlight it in the Mone heroes thumbnail list and then press the Pon WB Yon WB aa 10 02 6016x4016 button Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the on WB and t buttons together for about two seconds during playback 188 Deleting Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list press the button To delete multiple selected photographs all photographs taken on a selected date or all photographs in the current playback folder use the Delete option in the playback menu Once deleted photographs can not be recovered Note that pictures that are protected or hidden can not be deleted Full Frame Thumbnail and Calendar Playback Press the 1 r
348. to 8 12 15 or 20 mm or to 12 012 mm A 15 015 mm the average of the entire frame 2120 620 mm Avg Average Note that unless Average is selected the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when anon CPU lens is used regardless of the setting selected for Non CPU lens data in the setup menu M 172 When Average is selected the average of the entire frame will be used for both CPU and non CPU lenses b5 Fine tune Optimal Exposure MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Use this option to fine tune the exposure value selected by the b5 Fine tune optimal exposure camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each P metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 1 6 EV Center weighted metering 0 Spot metering 0 V Fine Tuning Exposure Exposure fine tuning is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation 4 icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation M 112 is preferred in most situations c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If On is selected exposure will lock when the shutter release cl Shutter release button AE button is pressed halfway c2 Standby timer MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are performed The shutter speed and aperture dis
349. tomatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Language MENU button gt setup menu Choose a language for camera menus and messages Image Comment MENU button gt setup menu Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately A 298 The comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display CQ 182 e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Input a comment as described on page 135 Comments can be up to 36 characters long Time zone Date and time Daylight saving time e Attach comment Select this option to attach the comment Image comment to all subsequent photographs Attach comment can be turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing gt mrpr M Attach comment ie 253 Auto Image Rotation MENU button gt setup menu Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback M 177 or when viewed in ViewNX 2 supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately Q 298 The following orientations are recorded E CODA ya Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when panning or taking photographs wit
350. trong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Note that noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through the lens M 55 during movie live view Flash lighting can not be used during movie live view Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed the mode dial is rotated or a remote control release mode is selected Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits exit live view when the camera is not in use Note that the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may rise and noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be displayed in the following instances the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicate a malfunction e The ambient temperature is high e The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies e The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods If live view does not start when you press the y button wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again Movie Settings Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to adjust the following settings e Frame size frame rate Movie quality Choose from the following options Frame size frame rate Movie _ Movie quality Maximum bit rate et E Maximum engr Frame size a ac high qual
351. ts Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately e BS 1 accessory shoe cover e DK 21 rubber eyecup e BM 14 monitor cover e BF 1B body cap e AN DC8 strap J e EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery e UC E15 USB cable with terminal cover e ViewNX 2 CD e User s Manual this guide e MH 25 battery charger AC wall e Warranty adapter supplied only in countries or regions where required Shape of Memory cards are sold power cable depends on country of separately sale The Camera Strap Attach the strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below XXIV Introduction Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual The Camera Bod 7 BRT Release mode dial cssssssssssssasssesaessssseteen 6 83 Be MODS a E 5 Mode dial lock release u escscscsesssesssssssesssesesees 5 Eyelet for camera strap 5 Release mode dial lock release uu 6 83 6 Accessory shoe for optional flash unit 292 Accessory SHOE COVEL essessesssscsecsecsssecsecnsenseess 292 BR ower SUI senis 1 BR Shutter release DUttON ssssssssssseeeessee 38 39 The Power Switch Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera on e s a
352. tton 0 242 247 Assign MB D14 button 247 Assign preview button 244 248 Assign shutter button 248 Attaching the lens cccsesseeeees 25 Auto White balance 0 115 Auto bracketing 153 241 Auto bracketing Set 241 Auto distortion control 217 Auto DX Crop ssssessessesssssesseseese 89 91 Auto flaSh esssesessossoossssseeresssseerssseeee 145 Auto FP high speed sync 234 235 Auto image rotatiOn eee 254 Auto ISO sensitivity control 107 Auto area AF sessessssssserssesse 99 100 Autoexposure lOCK ssesssesesserss 110 AUtOFOCUGS ececseeees 51 52 97 102 Autofocus MOCE ecssesecseeees 51 97 AUTO SErVO AF cessesssectsssessseeseeees 97 Available Setting 309 B Backlight esssesssssessssessssserssseees 2 231 Backup Role played by card in Slot 2 esesssssssseessssssssceceesssssseeesressssssee 96 Battery 21 23 35 255 331 Battery info sssseesssssesessssseesssssseeesss 255 Battery life eesssssssseeseeseesees 337 Battery OFder ssessssessseeseeessees 233 Battery pack 232 233 247 255 297 BEE unini s 228 Bit rate eee eee ere ine ee ee 65 Black and white Monochrome 266 Blue intensifier Filter effects 267 Body CaP essssessscsssecsssesseess 3 25 298 Border PictBridge sseceeee 198 Bracketing ssecssssssecsseerees 153 241 Bracketing OFdel sssssecseceesees 241
353. tton is pressed in continuous release mode Continuous shooting is not available if built in flash fires Q 145 Image size can not be changed Image quality set to NEF RAW M 93 Camera is slow to record photos Turn long exposure noise reduction off V 218 317 318 Noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines appear in photos e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction M 105 218 e Shutter speed is slower than 1 s use long exposure noise reduction M 218 e Turn Active D Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise M 137 AF assist illuminator does not light e AF assist lamp does not light if AF Cis selected for autofocus mode M 97 or if continuous servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF A mode Choose AF S If an option other than auto area AF is selected for AF area mode select center focus point M 99 101 e The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded e Off selected for Custom Setting a7 Built in AF assist illuminator M 223 e Illuminator has turned off automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Smudges appear in photographs Clean front and rear lens elements If problem persists perform image sensor cleaning 21 301 Sound is not recorded with movies Microphone off is selected for Movie settings gt Microphone The brightness of the image in the monitor differs f
354. u 7 Long exposure NR OFF High ISO NR NORM Press the MENU button to display the menus i ISO sensitivity settings i Remote control mode G 2s Highlight Interval timer shooting in the A E Multiple exposure OFF Interval timer shooti OFF shooting menu and press P Timelapse photooraphy OEE MENU button 2 Choose a sta rting time Interval timer shooting g 5 Choose start time Chose from the following starting triggers e To start shooting immediately highlight Now gt and press Shooting begins about 3 s 30 01 00 after settings are completed proceed to O eee Step 3 e Tochoosea starting time highlight Start time Interval timer shooting and press gt to display the start time Cine options shown at right Press lt or P to highlight hours or minutes and press A or 2 10 05 1 to change Press to continue Sue lt Move Choose the interval Interval timer shooting Press lt or P to highlight hours minutes or _ seconds press A or W to change Choose an gt interval longer than the time needed to take BAe orn the number of shots selected in Step 4 If the a interval is too short the number of photos taken may be less than the total listed in Step 4 the number of intervals multiplied by the number of shots per interval Press to continue 164 4 Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval Press lt or P to highlight number of intervals or nu
355. ubject is back lit flash pops up automatically when shutter release button is pressed halfway and fires as required red eye reduction Use for portraits Red eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires reducing red eye off Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back lit SLOW slow sync Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light Use to include background lighting in portraits REAR rear curtain sync Flash fires just before shutter closes creating a stream of light behind moving light sources below at right If this icon is not displayed flash will fire as the shutter opens front curtain sync the effect this produces with moving light sources is shown below at left Front curtain sync Rear curtain sync M The Built in Flash Use with lenses with focal lengths in FX format of 24 300 mm 16 300 mm in DX format M 288 Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of zoom lenses with a macro function i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400 At values over 6400 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash fires in continuous release mode M 83 only one picture will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after
356. uce the desired results if Auto is selected the camera will automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene 4 Choose the amount of smoothing HOR high dynamic range To choose how much the boundaries between the two images are smoothed HDR mode E Exposure differential highlight Smoothing and press P Smoothing The options shown at right will be eo P moothin displayed Highlight an option and press 6 te Higher values produce a smoother CFD i 1 1 orma composite image Uneven shading may be Herma visible with some subjects 5 Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera takes two exposures when the shutter release wi ty button is pressed all the way down tot will be E dan displayed in the control panel and tab Har in the ALS viewfinder while the images are combined no photographs can be taken until recording is complete Control panel Regardless of the option currently selected for release mode only one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed ZIAN Viewfinder If On series is selected HDR will only turn off when Off is selected for HDR mode if On single photo is selected HDR turns off automatically after the photograph is taken The HJ icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends V Framing HDR Photographs The edges of the image will be cropped out The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during sh
357. unansnnninses 218 HJ Retouch history ssssssssessessessessesssssssresreseeseeseene 261 IMAGE COMMENt ssssesessssseresssssresssssrrsssssrresssrre 253 Name of photographer ccsecssesseeseeees 256 29 Copyright holder cucscsesssssesssssssesssseeessees 256 N WO ON WM BW Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on Displayed if Custom Setting b5 Fine tune optimal exposure M 226 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method Displayed only if VR lens is attached Displayed in yellow if picture is in non FX format including DX based movie format M 63 89 Standard Vivid Portrait and Landscape Picture Controls only Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls Monochrome Picture Controls only The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 256 EE GPS Data 1 Latitude B2 Longitude 35 35 971 JEJ Altitude pees Be 43 696 Coordinated Universal Time UTC BW N 39M TIME UTC 15 04 2012 01 15 00 Data for movies are for start of recording 183 184 Hi Overview Data P 1 4000 F2 8 85mm i4 1 3 Hi4 1 0 4 SLOw GPs MEAUTO 0 0 sRGB E amp aSD AN 13 HRU a Pe BT ZC 0 10 Q2 28 o 1 10 9 Frame number total number of images 2 Protect stat S en ee 188 JEJ Camera name Retouch iINdI
358. unset waa dusk dawn pet portrait candlelight amp blossom autumn colors 4 food silhouette Mil high key E low key programmed auto with flexible program P shutter priority auto aperture priority auto A manual M U1 user settings 1 U2 user settings 2 5 5 EV in increments of 3 or 2 EV 2 3 frames in steps of 1 3 2 2 3 1 2 or 3 EV 2 3 frames in steps of 1 3 2 2 3 1 2 or 3 EV 2 3 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3 frames using preset values for all frames Luminosity locked at detected value with it AE L AF L button ISO 100 6400 in steps of 3 or 1 2 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 50 equivalent below ISO 100 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 or 2 EV ISO 25600 equivalent above ISO 6400 auto ISO sensitivity control available Auto Extra high High Normal Low Off Nikon Multi CAM 4800 autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 39 focus points including 9 cross type sensors the center 33 points are available at apertures slower than f 5 6 and faster than f 8 while the center 7 focus points are available at f 8 and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F e Autofocus AF Single servo AF AF S continuous servo AF AF C auto AF S AF C selection AF A predictive focus tracking activated automati
359. up q SETUP MENU Format memory card menu Save user settings F Reset user settings Press the MENU button to display the menus Monitor brightness ean image sensor Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup A ETATE Image Dust Off ref photo menu and press P HDMI MENU button 2 Select Clean now Clean image sensor The camera will check the image sensor and then begin cleaning This process takes Gean non about 10 seconds during this time 5u 5 Clean at startup shutdown 8 flashes in the control panel and other operations can not be performed Do not remove or disconnect the power source until A cleaning is complete and Hu 5 4 is no longer displayed Cleaning image sensor Place the Camera Base Down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right 301 EE Clean at Startup Shutdown Choose from the following options Option Description The i i ically clean h time the camera i SON Clean at startup e image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on F Clean at The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time shutdown the camera is turned off r CI tstart l l Oe Praa upa The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at shutdown Cleaning off Automatic image sensor cleaning off 1 Select Clean at startup shutdown Clean image sensor Display the Clean image sensor menu as descr
360. ure to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500 K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue The camera white balance options are adapted to the following color temperatures Sodium vapor lamps 2 700 K 3 direct sunlight 5 200 K Incandescent 4 flash 5 400 K i warm white fluorescent 3 000 K cloudy 6 000 K mt white fluorescent 3 700 K mt daylight fluorescent 6 500 K mt cool white fluorescent 4 200 K mt high temp mercury vapor 7 200 K i day white fluorescent 5 000 K tf shade 8 000 K See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing set N 241 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance M 156 Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the Yon WB button and rotating the sub command dial EE The White Balance Menu
361. us focus priority Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Es Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when AF C is selected for autofocus mode The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released a2 AF S Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When AF S is selected for viewfinder photography CH 97 this option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus focus priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Es Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected if the in focus indicator is displayed when AF S is selected for autofocus mode focus will lock while the shutter release button is pressed halfway Focus lock continues until the shutter is released 221 a3 Focus Tracking with Lock On MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject when AF C is selected or continuous servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF A mode for viewfinder photography M 97 Option Description AFE 5 Long AFE 4 When the distance
362. utton Ba AE BRT RAW Option Preview FV lock AE AF lock AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only AF ON Flash off Bracketing burst Active D Lighting NEF RAW Matrix metering Center weighted metering Spot metering Description Press the Fn button to preview depth of field M 77 Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash and compatible optional flash units only A 149 294 Press again to cancel FV lock Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus The shutter release button can not be used to focus The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed If the Fn button is pressed while exposure flash or ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet shutter release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If white balance bracketing is active or continuous release mode mode CH or CL is selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to adjust Active D Lighting M 137 If image quality is set to JPE
363. utton when 72 images are displayed Date list QYATTT Thumbnail list Full frame Thumbnail playback Calendar playback playback The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list To Ue Description Toggle between date Press Q8 ISO button in date list to place cursor in list and thumbnail list SBO thumbnail list Press again to return to date list Exit to thumbnail e Datelist Exit to 72 frame playback playback Zoominon amp QUAL e Thumbnaillist Press and hold amp QUAL button to zoom highlighted photo in on highlighted picture Highlight dates Highlight images e Date list Highlight date e Thumbnail list Highlight picture Toggle full frame e Date list View pictures taken on selected date playback e Thumbnail list View highlighted picture Delete highlighted e Date list Delete all pictures taken on selected date photo s e Thumbnail list Delete highlighted picture M 189 Change protect status of highlighted photo See page 188 for more information Return to shooting IA Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken mode EN immediately Create retouched copy of photo highlighted in thumbnail list N 69 261 Retouch photo A e 186 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp QUAL button to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playba
364. ve a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification 4 Edit the selected Picture Control See page 132 for more information To abandon any changes and start over from default settings press the r button Press when settings are complete 5 Select a destination Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt MENU button SHOOTING MENU NEF RAW recording White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Auto distortion control Color space Active D Lighting HDR high dynamic range OFF Manage Picture Control a Save edit gt Load save Manage Picture Control 5 Choose Picture Control ENL Neutral EMC Monochrome EPT Portrait ELS Landscape Grid Adjust ff Quick adjust Sharpening Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue Qe tw OK 0 Manage Picture Control Save as a EC Unused EC3 Unused ECA Unused ECS Unused ECS Unused C7 Unused 6 Name the Picture Control The text entry dialog shown at right will be displayed By default new Picture Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control to use the default Name area SxeCursor Giinput CIOK name proceed to Step 7 To move the cursor in the name area hold the Q7 ISO button and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to
365. w do I format memory cards How do restore default settings How do get help for a menu or message How do I copy photos to a computer How do I print photos Can print the date of recording on my photos Maintenance and Optional Accessories What memory cards can use What lenses can use What optional flash units Speedlights can use What other accessories are available for my camera What software is available for my camera What do do with the supplied eyepiece cap How do I clean the camera Where should take my camera for servicing and repairs LO 261 279 264 271 269 270 275 69 LO 18 20 27 253 12 16 228 33 55 62 229 258 27 253 31 250 151 214 221 18 322 A 193 195 196 203 198 203 A 334 285 292 297 298 86 300 gt PLAYBACK MENU M 207 Delete Selected Select date All Playback folder ND600 default All Current Hide image Select set Select date Deselect all Playback display Done options Basic photo info Focus point Additional photo info None image only Highlights RGB histogram Shooting data Overview Select source Copy image s Select image s Select destination folder Copy image s Image review On Off default After delete Show next default Show previous Continue as before Rotate tall On default Off Slide show Start Image type Frame interval DPOF print order Select set Deselect all SHOOTING ME
366. wfinder Grid Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display on demand grid lines in the viewfinder for RRARuIaRIrET reference when composing photographs 8 d3 ISO Display and Adjustment MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Show ISO sensitivity or Show ISO Easy ISO is selected the control panel will show ISO sensitivity in place of the number of exposures remaining If Show ISO Easy ISO is selected ISO sensitivity can be set in modes P and S by rotating the sub command dial or in mode A by rotating the main command dial Select Show frame count to display the number of exposures remaining in the control panel d4 Screen Tips MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display tool tips for items selected in the a4 Screen tips information display 11 K d5 CL Mode Shooting Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the maximum frame advance rate in CL continuous low a5 CL mode shooting speed speed mode M 83 during interval timer photography this a setting also determines the frame advance rate for single 4 4 fps 3 3 fps frame 2 2 fps 1 1 fps T 229 d6 Max Continuous Release MENU button gt Custom Settings menu The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d6
367. will be shifted to the right Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor 181 182 EE Shooting Data MTR SPD AP EXP MODE IS Ea FOCAL LENGT LENS FLASH TYPE SYNC MODE s E M TTL OONOAOURWN WHITE BALAN COLOR SPACE QUICK ADJU SHARPENING CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SATURATION HUE N N a ee e e d PICTURE CTRL 6 1 4000 F2 8 0 P Hi0 3 PAAR 5 6 H 85mm ye in 3 n i 2 F CE AUTO1 0 0 SRGB STANDARD oe NOISE REDUC ACT D LIGH HDR VIGNETTE CT RETOUCH COPYR IGHT T AU RL CYANOTYPE TRIM SPRING HAS COME NIKON TARO NIKON Z NIKON D600 F 100 1 Meteri Reemeerereeencere content renter senate tere arin rrr 109 Shutter speld cssaiccssescacedastacorstanestarssnvaciaciecsaarsetes 74 PPL CUS eana 74 SHOOTING MOE ss ssseesssessseesssessseesssersss 35 40 73 k ISO sensitivity ote cessesseessecseesesseeseesseeseesee 105 Exposure COMPENSATION cccceseseeeeeeeeeees 112 F Optimal exposure TUNING 2 cessessecseesseeees 226 Focal length sssssssssessesssssesesssseessss 172 288 291 5 AE e encarierauamcumacncmninenaies 172 FOCUS MOJE usnama 97 103 Lens VR vibration reduction Flas
368. y rotating one of the command dials see note On Auto reset below The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires exposure compensation settings selected using the E4 button are not reset As above except that the exposure compensation value selected using the On command dial is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the 4 button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b3 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f5 Customize command dials gt Change main sub M 245 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off On P Sub commanddial Sub command dial S Sub commanddial Main command dial A Maincommanddial Sub command dial M N A Show ISO Easy ISO Custom Setting b3 Easy exposure compensation can not be used with Custom Setting d3 Show ISO Easy ISO Adjustments to either of these items reset the remaining item a message is displayed when the item is reset 225 226 b4 Center Weighted Area MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When calculating exposure center weighted metering assigns b4 Center weishted area the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the frame The ERTE diameter of this circle can be set

Nikon 13187 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents